*
//.
^ci
Wiist,
to
PRINCETON, N. J.
■ I I ’ I ■ i 1
.
4
i
I .
• Jjfti . ,
■
. - •
‘ l
'
m
,
, <
■
-
*
.
t
'
SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
(ZDamfmtrge:
$rintefl at tfte ©niDersitp tfress.
»
THE
ELEMENTS
OF
RIAC GRAMMA
BY THE
KEY. GEORGE PHILLIPS, B.D.
FELLOW AND TUTOR OF QUEENS’ COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE.
THE SECOND EDITION ,
WITH
amendments and additions.
LONDON:
JOHN W. PARKER, WEST STRAND.
M.DCCC.XLV.
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2019 with funding from
Princeton Theological Seminary Library
https://archive.org/details/elementsofsyriacOOphil
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The following “Elements of Syriac Grammar” are
intended for the assistance of those Students in He¬
brew, who are desirous of extending their studies to
the Syriac language. This object may he easily ac¬
complished, in consequence of the close affinity which
exists between the two languages, both in their struc¬
ture as well as in the multitude of words which they
possess in common. By bestowing therefore a small
portion of time and labour on the study of Syriac, the
/ Hebrew scholar will he sure to obtain a moderate
knowledge of the subject. It is indeed so nearly allied
to Hebrew, and especially to Chaldee, that after he
has read the Chaldee parts of the Bible he may at
once proceed to the reading of Syriac. Such being the
case, it becomes important that the student should pos¬
sess himself of the assistance which the Syriac affords
him for the better understanding of Hebrew; not to
mention that by it he will be brought to an acquaint¬
ance with numerous ecclesiastical documents belonging
to the early and middle ages, which treat of the creed
and practice of the Syrian branch of the church of
h
VI
PREFACE.
Christ in those times. The Syriac, as a dialect of the
Hebrew, must always he regarded as constituting a
source of valuable information for the criticism of the
Hebrew Bible. By an examination of a Hebrew word
as it is used in this language, essential service has
been rendered in elucidating many difficult and im¬
portant passages of Holy Writ; and it has been the
constant practice of commentators to have recourse to
Syriac, whenever the Text of the Old Testament fails
to establish satisfactorily the signification of a word.
In such case every person allows that a reference to
Syriac is one of the legitimate means to be employed
in determining the sense of a passage; and although
this language is inferior to Arabic in the extent and
variety of its literature, it is nevertheless superior as
regards its much more intimate connection with the
original language of the Bible.
But the great claim, as it appears to me, which
the Syriac has on the attention of that class of per¬
sons, for whose use this book is intended, consists in
the Syriac New Testament. The high antiquity of
this version, and its use in the early established Syrian
church, stamp an importance on it which can be
assigned to no other: and if, in addition to these
circumstances it be borne in mind, that the Syriac
language is so nearly the same as that spoken in
Palestine in the first age of Christianity, that by
PREFACE.
VI1
many persons it has been termed the vernacular lan¬
guage of our Lord, it must be allowed that the Syriac
New Testament possesses a value inferior only to that
which belongs to the original, Michaelis, who de¬
voted his great talents to the study of Syriac, and
to an examination of the Syriac version, has en¬
deavoured, in his Introduction to the New Testament,
to fix the period when that version was made; and
after bringing forward many cogent arguments in
favour of its high antiquity, has inferred that it must
have existed, either at the end of the first or the
beginning of the second century. This great age,
and its frequent deviation from the common reading
in passages of importance, must recommend the use of
it to every critic; and the truth is, that it has been
more used than all other sources of critical assistance
together.
From these remarks it will obviously appear desir¬
able that the Hebrew scholar should not rest satisfied
till he has obtained a knowledge of the Syriac. To
afford facility for this attainment was my great in¬
ducement in sending forth, a few years ago, these
Elements of Syriac Grammar to the public; and I
rejoice that the book, having been favourably received,
has afforded me satisfactory proof that the publication
has not entirely failed in being useful. The copies
of the first impression having been sold off, I have
bz
Vlll
PREFACE.
now the pleasure of presenting a second Edition, con¬
taining many amendments and additions, which have
been made for the purpose of adapting the Grammar
to the somewhat more advanced state to which Syriac
literature has now gradually arrived. The additions, it
will he noticed, are scattered throughout the work.
At the end are several pieces of Syriac, with a partial
analysis subjoined to each, so that they may serve as
first lessons for construing; after which the student,
I doubt not, will he fully competent to commence
translating the Syriac Testament with no other helps
than those of his Grammar and Lexicon.
In introducing these additions the plan of the
Grammar has not been at all disturbed, and I think
I may cite, as equally applicable to this republication
of the book, the words I employed in the preface to
the first Edition when speaking of the manner in
which it was executed. “ I have endeavoured to be
simple in the arrangement, to account for the vowel
changes, and the various inflexions of words by the
operation of a very few principles, and to exhibit in a
concise form the general structure of the language.”
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Introductory Observations ----- l
The Alphabet - -- -- -- 6
Vowels - -- -- -- 8
Diphthongs - - - - - - -12
Properties and changes of Consonants - —
Changes of the Vowels - - - - - -16
The Diacritic Points, Kushoi and Rukok - - - 18
Ribui - - - - i - - -28
Linea Occultans, &c. ----- 24
Marhetono and Mehagyono - - - - - 26
Other Diacritic Points - - - - 28
On the pronunciation of certain letters, &c. - - - 29
Accent - -- -- --80
Method of expressing numbers - - - - - 81
Reading Exercises ------ —
✓
NOUNS -------- 33
Gender -------34
Number --------86
States of Nouns ------ 39
Adjectives - - - - - - -51
Numerals - -- -- -- 53
PRONOUNS -------- 57
Personal Pronouns ------ —
Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - 58
Relative and Interrogative Pronouns - —
X
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Pronominal Affixes - - - - - 59
Nouns with Affixes - - - - - - 61
Example of a masc. noun with Affixes - - - —
Example of a fem. noun with Affixes 65
VERBS -------- 68
Tenses, &c. of the Verbs "jooi and /u] - - - 73
X
Paradigm of ^. - 78
Observations on regular Verbs 80
Verbs which have a guttural for a rad. letter - - - 84
The Present Tense, &c. ----- 85
IRREGULAR VERBS . 86
tt ft
Verbs or .87
tr
... ^ ._ - 90
rt
Paradigm of ^- 2 ) ------ 91
. 92
94
tt tr
Verbs Q-L or « — - - - - - 96
ft
... ------- 99
tt
...S.- -—
Paradigm of I>OCLO - - - - - -100
p
. .104
Verbs vb..106
The Objective affixes attached to Verbs - - - 107
Paradigm of U-O - - - - - -108
Observations on Objective affixes - - - - 115
P
The Verb lh. with affixes - - - - - 117
» • • « • «
... ^
CONTENTS.
XI
Paradigm of the Verb \v
Doubly Defective Verbs
Quadriliteral Verbs
PARTICLES
Adverbs -
Prepositions -
Conjunctions and Interjections -
SYNTAX
Syntax of Nouns
Construction of Adjectives
.Numerals
Syntax of Pronouns
... Verbs
... Prepositions
... Particles
Enallage of Persons and Number
Ellipsis -
APPENDIX -
St John’s Gospel, Chap. n. -
Analysis -
Lessons for Construing
PAGE
- 118
121
- 122
124
125
- 126
127
- 182
134
- 135
141
- 153
154
- 155
156
- 158
164
- 167
182
ERRATA.
rAGK
LINK
FOR
n o n 0 0
READ
0 0 P P f>
10
17
q
w
<
]A v y\n
30
5
*0
sO
32
16
^1°
I
^-.(.Lolo
X
30
21
1
}
n\
50
6
, P ,t 7
(Id (i^j
X
sJ O
.P 7 • P * p
IW->? to
X
O
72
15
♦♦
.*OAJ
V ••
131
0
after ( CTlt )
insert a comma.
H
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
The Syriac language, a branch of the Shemetic family,
was the vernacular tongue of Syria for many ages pre¬
viously to the Christian Era, and continued to he so till
the period of the Mahometan invasion of the country,
when Arabic being introduced as the sacred language
of the conquerors, in a short time entirely superseded
that which had been heretofore in use. It was also
called Aramean, as the country itself had anciently
the designation of Aramea or Aram probably, as is
supposed from Aram the son of Shem, by whose de¬
scendants it was peopled. This name seems to have
obtained in very remote times, being known to Homer,
who calls the inhabitants 'Ape/moi, II. n. 783. The
word is found in 2 Kings xviii. 26; Isaiah xxxvi. 11;
Ezech. iv. 7, and Daniel ii. 4.
The early history of the Syrians is but little known.
With the exception of a few particulars, which may
be gathered from Scripture, little can be said about
them till the time they were carried away into the
kingdom of Assyria. The country of the Syrians was
for a long time subjected to the monarchs of Persia;
but soon after the conquests of Alexander it got under
Greek rule, and became more prominent among the
nations. Seleucus, one of Alexander’s generals, after
the death of his master, became governor of Babylon,
and, tempted by the example of his brother generals,
1
2
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
he set up for himself, when, after obtaining some vic¬
tories over Antigonus and Nicanor, he took the title
of king of Babylon and Media. He continued on the
throne till his death, when he was succeeded by his
son and so on, the country being ruled by his family
for several generations, the last of whom was Antio-
chus, who began to reign B. c. 225. This monarch,
possessed of great military talents and being very am¬
bitious, soon engaged in the design of extending his
kingdom. Accordingly he undertook an expedition
against the Parthians, whom he obliged to conclude a
peace on very advantageous terms. He afterwards
gained victories in Bactria and India. In the year
204 B. c. he entered into a league with Philip of
Macedon against Ptolemy Epiphanes, the king of
Egypt. He defeated the Egyptian general, and re¬
covered all Palestine and Ccelosyria. After this he
invaded Asia Minor in the hopes of reducing it also;
but the free cities had recourse to the Romans, who
soon made a declaration of war against Antiochus, van¬
quished him first at Thermopylae, and afterwards so
completely at Magnesia, that the issue of the battle
was, that Syria became a Roman province. Such
being, in a few words, the history of this country, we
might infer that the language would, in the first place,
partake of the Persian Idiom; that many terms and
phrases would be common to both languages; and thus
we find is the case. Again, for the same reason, many
Greek and Latin words have crept into the Syriac, as
we perceive from the Peshito version of the New Tes-
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
3
tament, but more especially from writings of a much
later date, such, for instance, as the Chronicles of Bar-
Hebrseus. Most of these are nouns, some Greek par¬
ticles are introduced; hut very few verbs appear to
have a foreign origin. We will subjoin a few ex¬
amples of such terms, both as they appear in the
Syriac and in the
original.
Persian
X
a lance.
X
silver.
pAi)
. P
idol.
»x ^
Q_0j.rO
.
covering of the head.
....
rhinoceros.
» P P 7
....
.
prefect of the treasury.
2. Greek
Words.
t
TV7 r09,
]mk)o4
T opus.
*x o
(JCU.jp
9
KCtVCOV 9
IUXd
i
kAcTs.
761/0?,
l^aa
/
7 TVpryOS.
U^=i
opyavoVj
yap.
7.7
X
CtVCtJKt /,
as
Se\
3. Latin
Words.
O H
velum ,
e 7
•
X
candela.
X
charta ,
^ 0 X
IpJpDCUD
custodes.
• 0 0
X
palatium ,
. P -X 7
PO^D
carruca.
fA.Sn
cella ,
jIAXoo ^..co]
speculator.
1—2
i
4
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
The Arabs and Turks, from their connection with
the country, have also exercised an influence over the
Syriac language. The Crusades, too, were the means
of getting some European words, chiefly proper names ,
introduced into the Syriac; thus we find ,jclo count ,
]_i_, prince , marquis.
IX
The Syriac and Chaldee are evidently dialects of
the same language, their differences being very small,
consisting quite as much in the pronunciation as in
grammatical inflexions and constructions. See the
Preface. The former was spoken in Western Aramea,
and the latter in the Eastern, viz. in the province of
Babylon, between the Euphrates and the Tigris.
The most ancient Syriac writings are said to be
the apocryphal Letters, which Abgar the king sent
to Christ, and our Lord’s answer. There are also those
who think that the original of St Matthew’s and St
John’s Gospels, and the Epistle to the Hebrews, were
written in Syriac. See Irenaeus adv. Haer. hi. Be
this as it may, there is no doubt of the very early
existence of a Syriac version of this and of the other
Gospels, and it is perhaps the oldest document we know
of; for the letter of Abgar was most likely written long
after the period to which it refers.
The Syrians, like many other ancient nations, have
laid claim to the invention of letters; but those who
have investigated this subject, supposing the art of
writing to be a mere human invention and not a divine
gift, are inclined to assign the discovery either to the
Egyptians or Phoenicians. From the Phoenician or
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
5
Chaldee characters, they suppose the Syriac were de¬
rived, as well as the ancient and modern Arabic.
There are two sets of Syriac letters, the one being
a modification of the other, or both of them having a
common original. They are called the Estrangelo and
Peshito; the former is found in the oldest MSS., and in
many monumental inscriptions. It is written in Syriac
which Asseman, in his Bibl. Orient. Tom.
vi. p. 378, supposes to be the same as the Greek word
(TTpoyyvXos, round; but as roundness is not a charac¬
teristic of this alphabet, J. D. Michaelis and Adler have
sought out another etymology, viz. the Arab. a
writing and gospel. They suppose these letters
were .employed in copies of the Scriptures, whilst the
more simple alphabet, because it could be written with
much greater rapidity, was that which was in use for
the common purposes of life. See the Appendix.
The Nestorians use characters partly resembling
the Estrangelo, and partly the Peshito; they occupy
as it were a middle place between the two alphabets;
and persons accustomed to read these, may readily
make out the Nestorian.
It has been very much the practice of Syrians,
since Arabic became the spoken language of the
country, to write it with Syriac letters. This mode of
writing is called after the name of the inventor Car-
shunic.
§. 1. The Syrians, in common with many other
Eastern
nations, read from the right hand to the left,
and have the same number
of letters, which
are all
consonants, as the
Hebrews.
The following
Table exhibits their forms
, names,
powers
and numerical values.
Forms.
Names.
Powers.
Numerical
Values.
1
Olaph
( H unaspirated
( as in humble
1
Beth
L^
T>
B Bh (Y)
2
%
Gomal
G
3
J
Dolath
ai;
•
r>
4
01
He
001
H
5
0
Yau
7
00
Y or W
6
1
Zain
y
Z
7
Cheth
Ch
8
Tetli
T
9
Yud
*
•
Y in yes
10
D
Copli
0
K or C as in care
20
Lomad
•
L
30
So
Mim
I
M
40
J
Nun
•X
V QJ
N
50
£D
Semkath
AnVnm
S
60
Ee
A
70
Pe
P Ph (F)
80
Tsode
Ts
90
n
Kuph
v£)CLO
K
100
•
i
Rish
•
R
200
Shin
Sh
300
z
Thau
oil
T or Th
400
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS.
7
All the letters except the eight ] > cn o ) ^ 5 L
may be joined to the following letter of the word.
The nine letters
2 j id a d j terminating
a word, receive a slight additional stroke, and are
written ^
4 - *0
The five
d 1 k) j i alter their figure at the end of a word,
and are called finals. They retain their usual power,
but assume the forms ^o, or
Care must be taken to distinguish between the
following letters, which have nearly the same figure,
and differ chiefly in their magnitude.
1 id 5 a 1 ^
* •
1 D 5 jo J ^ ^
2)
One letter is joined to another by a small hori¬
zontal line drawn from its extremity; as, cn in oil.
The exceptions to this are ? £ 5 and 2, which when
joined to another letter assume the forms r £ - r and A.
The following compound characters are frequently
used.
Olaph-Lomad 21 for 1]
Lomad-Olaph
Lomad-Lomad
As Letters of the same organ are frequently
changed for one another in the process of deriva¬
tion ; Grammarians have divided the whole Alphabet
into classes according to the organ of speech by which
they are enounced.
8
VOWELS.
Gutturals
Linguals
Palatals
Dentals
Labials
1
1
01
4
SD
O
vx
^ 0
So
z
The consonants ] o will frequently become quies¬
cent, i.e. lose their power as consonants; as is the case
with the Hebrew vn**-
2 . Vowels.
It is probable that the quiescent letters ] o were
used in the early stages of the language as vowels,
and were the only vowels which in those times were
known. The consequence was that many words were
not sufficiently defined in writing, and that a vowel was
often understood, and had to be supplied in speaking.
To meet this defect, which existed at one period or
another in the whole family of the Shemetic lan¬
guages, a system of punctuation came gradually into
use. The first step taken to meet the wants of the
reader was the introduction of a point, which by its
position, above or below a word, indicated the proper
vowel. The employment of it, however, was very par¬
tial, and its primary object, perhaps, was little more
than the determining of those words which, without
it, would be ambiguous. See Appendix. When this
point was first brought into the written Syriac, it is
now impossible to ascertain. Many Grammarians have
assigned its invention to the school of Edessa; but
although historical testimony on this matter is very
VOWELS.
9
imperfect, we are nevertheless inclined to go back to
a more remote period. It is pretty certain that it, or
something equivalent to it, must have been employed
in the third or fourth century, and perhaps much before
that time; for Ephraim must have used some note of
distinction in his comment on Gen. xxxvi. 24. viz.
7, 7, y Y . .-n n .pp, « P Y Y y-n. p
p5aiA
"X 7 \ 1 )
A A 0^1? A olo jacuZU?
I XX
A. . It is proper to observe here that we find
D 7 7
\$n2> in both Testaments , and not as some un-
skilful persons have thought. In this observation,
Ephraim must have had some mark whereby he could
distinguish from \fn ^ • and it is likely, if we
had works older than those of Ephraim, we should
be able to recognize a mode of distinction in them,
and that mode would probably be by the point we are
here speaking of. It is quite clear, however, that had
this point been as extensively employed as it is capa¬
ble of being, still it would be quite inadequate for
the purposes for which it was intended. The precise
vowel could not be known by such a mark; and hence
Grammarians set themselves to work to devise some
other method of more fully defining the sense and
pronunciation of words. Now the Greek language and
literature were much known to the Syriac scholars of
the time to which we have referred, and their atten¬
tion having been brought to the imperfect condition of
their vowel system ; and, further, having been able to
10
VOWELS.
observe the accuracy of the Greek, they perceived that
its vowels might he advantageously engaged in the
service of their own language. Two modes of repre¬
senting these said vowels were adopted about or nearly
at the same time; one was by means of one or two
points being placed in different positions, and the
other was by writing above or below the word the
Greek signs themselves, with some slight change in
their forms. This system of punctuation was begun by
Theophilus of Edessa, according to Asseman (see his
Bibli. Orient. Tom. i. p. 64), and was advanced step
by step till it was brought to its present state of per¬
fection. Theophilus died about the year 791 of our
era.
Vowels, by native Grammarians, are called some¬
times by one and sometimes by another of the fol-
OOOO 0 p 0 0 #
lowing names : A v A n vocals : letters without
a word; ]Lo] motions; ) A« m sounds; po¬
sitions; Ivoqj points.
The following Table exhibits their names, powers
and forms :
Names.
Pethocho
Power.
a
Figure.
Syr. Greek.
• y
•
Alpha
1 s= ,}
Revotso
e
ID
• ••
sD
Epsilon
Chevotso
i
JD
I
Iota
iiLQi
Zekofo
0
0
^D
Omicron
Ivr
Etsotso
u
•
OO QJD
•
♦X
QJD
Upsilon.
VOWELS.
11
The points of the vowel Zekofo may coalesce
with the point of the letter 5, as, oii Roll-tin.
x
The vowel Etsotso is always accompanied with o
except in the two words ^ cul , M’tul.
When no vowel is expressed, then as in the
Hebrew, a Sheva (or one of its substitutes) will he
implied and read accordingly.
Vowels may he divided into two classes: pure , i. e.
those which complete their syllables: and impure ,
i. e. those which do not complete the syllable with¬
out the addition of a terminating consonant.
Pure Vowels are
When followed by
a quiescent *) O or _»
/
as Ma-lepk.
Ethekel.
'Ts
u.
• 0 Q
_ e as K’tho-bo.
• *X
o -x vQCLSU Ne-puk.
Impure Vowels are
y m. e 7
_ 7 as in ^ cad. (SoA dda-mo.
9 9
_ -x . _Ao Men.
_ . 12a i-do-tho.
Final syllables are often, as in Hebrew, anoma¬
lously long, on account perhaps of the accent; as,
12
VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS.
> <^ ) ? A-pin, where 1 occurs with two consonants,
i
so also A-»l LJL voAj] 7 ^Ajf, &c.
X H "
The Greek vowels are more frequently used than
the others in modern books.
3. Diphthongs.
There are several diphthongs made by the letters
Vau and Yud, which losing their own powers coalesce
with the preceding vowel and form one syllable.
Vau makes four diphthongs au , eu, iu , ou.
The first occurs in the beginning, middle and end
of words, and is produced by the vowel v preceding
o; as, au-kel , he fed , ]SooI Tsau-mo , the fast ,
-7N ^
ojcn ho-nau , /AAs* ««?.
The second e?/, by the vowel ^ preceding a_»; as,
^cno_iAj*|, j Esh-teu, I will drink it.
** 'n 'h
The third in by a chevotso preceding a_*; as,
L i . Nsliad-riu 9 he will send him.
%
X
The fourth ou is when o is preceded by another
o with * x ; as, Shou-do-yo 9 promise.
Yud makes two diphthongs, ai and oi: ai by ?
before _>; as, A . G’laith , thou hast revealed: oi is
effected by before ^; as, w*<ti hoi 9 she.
4. Properties and Changes of Consonants.
Consonants possess various properties and undergo
certain changes arising from the influence of vowels;
or other causes, which we proceed to mention.
PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
13
The letters ) o j when they are not pronounced,
but rest in the sound of the vowel on the preceding
letter, are called quiescent.
Olaph final rests in e or as, K the man ,
1 ,^ 1 ^ the men: except the four verbs / he was
y v
y 7
7 7 '
impure , ]»o he was comforted, he polluted ,
T\
he was decorated.
Olaph in the middle of a word rests in * or 1 ;
as, to eat, jio}So to say. Yud is sometimes
'tS X
changed into Olaph quiescent in x ; as, ,Z4So to beget ,
'IS X
for .
'IS I
Yud usually rests in ^ or 1 ; as, he begun ,
X
is, but.
X is
Vau deprived of a vowel is for the most part qui¬
escent in x ; as, ^oo_o rise , !>oq2 day. It is also used
as the fulcrum, or, as it is technically termed, the
mater lectionis of this vowel; as,
'is
In foreign words Vau is frequently found to be
quiescent in the vowel o ; as, sdoP eter , *cdqjo>2
'IS
throne.
The letters ] o when they are placed after an¬
other consonant, which is without a vowel, cannot be
pronounced ; hut they are nevertheless written for the
sake of orthography or etymology. In such instances
these letters are said to be otiose.
Olaph in the pronouns ^oAj! 7 and ^Aj] 7 , when they
14
PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
are added to participles for the sake of forming the
present tense, is otiose; as, ^Aj] V -Af\ n kot-litun ,
“ i
and Sa A kot-loten, ye slay, masc. and fem.
Vau and Yud in the end of a word, when the
preceding letter has no vowel, are also otiose; as,
o tital, they slew, masc. tital, they slew,
fem. ktid, slay thou , imper. fem.
Yud is likewise otiose in the pronoun ^Aj] 7 at,
thou; in certain affixes; as, . * malk, my king,
ktho-heh, thy hook . And in some substantives
'is
and adverbs; as, . ».\« shel, tranquillity, ^Akd, when ?
'is 'Is
It is supposed by many grammarians that Yud was
pronounced in ancient times, and this supposition derives
support from the usage in Arabic and Hebrew; for we
have which are pronounced chali and akzari;
we have also in the New Testament pafifiowl, John xx. lb;
ra\iOd kou/jli, Mark v. 41 ; and other similar expressions.
Consonants are sometimes omitted in writing; as,
end for especially in compound words; as,
man for for . ] although. The
'IS / 7v'
first radical ^ of Hebrew words sometimes drops off;
as, ^ one, Heh. in^ * Words which have the middle
radical doubled, on many occasions lose one of them;
thus, and . « ^ he perceived, nest from
n\
Vau and Yud fall off in nearly the same manner
and in the same situations as in Hebrew, which may
PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
15
be immediately observed by inspecting tbe paradigms
of tbe classes of verbs beginning with these letters.
Letters are sometimes added to words for the sake
of euphony. Thus, Olaph is prefixed to many words
beginning with Yud; as, hand for jvnVo day
for IsqSo, .
There are some Greek nouns, which are sometimes
written with an Olaph at the beginning and sometimes
•X 7 1* >x 7 p 7 -n
without; as, ^coojl^l^cd] Stephen;
v a_. r ^TDo stadium.
Olaph prosthetic occurs also in the verbs and
x
as, he drunh , and he found.
X T> 7 \
We have also ] •^ hero from Mill, where the
Nun seems to be a compensation for the Dagesh forte
in Hebrew and Chaldee. In some words of Greek
origin there is a duplication of the Nun; as, .ran j m ra
synod, for ^cccjJoxd .
A great number of Hebrew words become Syriac
words by the change of one or more of their letters.
f is changed into
? as,
ini
T T
gold.
. P 7
x .
4 -
■nx
rock.
’^4
w .
i ...
bw
snow,
1 .
Ol ...
rn
he run.
4m
n .
| or j ...
rfci
T T
he revealed.
sometimes into
%£D ...
T T
Jlesh,
flXLCi
3 .
•
3
• - :
two.
is
n .
4 ...
nyn
T T
he wandered.
]i4.
16
CHANGES OF THE VOWELS.
5. Changes of the Vowels.
Inflexions of words are in numerous cases ef¬
fected by vowels; certain vowels being selected as
characteristic of different forms of the same word.
The correspondence between Syriac and Hebrew vowels
is as follows:
Pethocho (?) to Patach (-); as, mnVn . izbn Ms
The vowel Revotso (f) corresponds generally to
the Hebrew as, jaA^Z, TipSfi thou shall visit.
- 7 \
Chevotso (x) to the Hebrew — ; as, ncnv for
x
Zekofo to Kamets t ; as, ^ 05 ], LHK man ,
he revealed.
Etsotso ( x ) to Cholem, Kametschatuph, Shurek and
Kibbuts; as, ]_»5 Q_o, holiness , £Hp; bs all.
Olaph in the beginning of a word, and also Ee
in the same situation, when it is before cn, instead of
being according to analogy without a vowel, will receive
a vowel, for the most part * or v ; as, for ;
v * c V
5CTLL tor 5CTLL.
• •
Yud observes the same rule at the beginning of
a word, and takes the vowel x ; as, orphan, for
The foregoing rule holds good also for the letters
Olaph, Vau and Yud when they begin a syllable; the
vowel in such places is remitted to the preceding letter,
CHANGES OF THE VOWELS.
17
if it has been previously without one; except when
the Olaph, Vau or Yud is followed by two consonants
in the same syllable. A full exhibition of these prin¬
ciples may be seen by looking at the irregular verbs.
When two consonants come together at the begin¬
ning of a syllable, which is sometimes the case in
the beginning of a word, in consequence of prefixing
prepositions or conjunctions not having a vowel; also
in the middle of a word from inflexion ; the former
consonant will receive a vowel; for the most part T";
but also ——-——; as, ]»v>.« A for ]» Vo » ^ in heaven ,
for )l d ^e letter , for ZZL^oZ] she was
'IS *
slain , glory for This is analo¬
gous to the Hebrew, when the former of two Shevas
coming together in the beginning of a syllable, is
generally changed into t .
Vowels are sometimes cast away: when another
syllable is added to a word, the final vowel is cast
away; as, Z^Q£> the feminine of he visited. But
is '
it is preserved, 1st. if a letter only be added; as,
7 ,o^ thou hast visited; 2nd. if the consonant from
the analogy of the Hebrew ought to have a Dagesh
forte; thus people; in the definite state
3rd. the vowels ^ and o are preserved; as, . - o
iJd;
• \
X X
Zekofo in nouns of the definite state, when it is
followed by ooi is, is changed into Pethocho, so that
2
18
CHANGES OF THE VOWELS.
it may make a diphthong with o; as, ooi da-go-
lau , lie is a liar , for ccn ]1^>; qjoi ho-nau, this is ,
for ocn jiai and this for ooi jjai.
Transposition of vowels takes place; especially in
nouns of one syllable; thus, man, definite state
holiness , definite state ; many other
examples will he given in the Chapter on nouns; also
the prepositions and ^o?qjd with the prefix
Lomad become \\A n n^\ and ^olooS, and in certain
compounded particles a transposition takes place; as,
for jiDji until.
6 . The Diacritic Points, Kushoi and Rutcotc.
The Syrians have no marks corresponding to the
Dagesh forte of the Hebrews; hut they use a point
for the letters
This point when it is situated above a letter takes
away the aspiration, and when placed below preserves
it. In the former case it is called Kushoi , which
signifies hardness , and in the latter Ruhok,
softness. In Manuscripts these points are made with
red ink.
Kushoi is used in the above-mentioned letters,
when any one of them begins a word; as, son ,
p ?
man.
But if one of the letters
vO 3 o
be
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK.
19
prefixed, then the radical receives a Rukok;
o 7 £> 7
as, li^b, \ .
If one of the letters ) o .. be before one of the
the latter takes the sign Rukok; as,
i (am) the Creator; | . »V I (am) chosen.
• ^
If the first letter of a noun be without a vowel,
then the second will receive a Rukok; as, breaking ,
]AAj filth, a hank.
The of father , according to Sciadrensis,
has a Rukok when a natural father, but a Kushoi
when a spiritual father is meant. See his Grammar,
P- }y
Those nouns which have ? to the first letter and
consist of four letters, the third takes a Kushoi; as,
sin, ) K^ a house; if, however, the noun be
feminine, then the third letter receives Rukok; as,
a daughter , a female slave , a garden.
If the noun consist of five letters, the third has
a Kushoi, and the fourth a Rukok; as, A a
star , l A^Vr) a queen , a generation. There
• •
are, however, a few which take a Rukok on the third,
and a Kushoi on the fourth; as, ]\ ^ Vn a teacher ,
* In this and the following remarks, when a Kushoi or Rukok
is spoken of as attached to a letter, a letter is always
meant.
2—2
20
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOl AND RUKOK.
V’r-Q an ape , ] A\lvn a walk or path, fAniiiD an
edition.
Again, with respect to nouns consisting of six
letters, the third takes Kushoi, but the fourth and
pi y o y -j ♦ • v
fifth Rukok; as, IL,j_q candle , ], .»vn\Z disciple ,
• •
• • i
lA^oio knowledge. A few nouns receive Kushoi in
the fifth; as, ]A^lqdoZ addition , ]/ \_« A\ 7 clothing.
If v he placed to the second letter of a noun,
then the third letter, if it possesses a vowel, will
take Kushoi; as, 14-^ new 9 splendour , &c But
if the letter which follows ? be without a vowel, then
the one after this will receive Rukok; as, \LJih a
bird , IAsoqj revenge , ] A\^m foolish. Four, however,
have a Kushoi on the fourth letter, viz. an
island , *|/\\ a heifer , IZfru burning , and «
chariot.
The letter after % if it be without a vowel, re¬
ceives a Rukok; as, a finger , « foot,
an ear, ] AVno L wisdom. There are a few exceptions,
which are mentioned by Sciadrensis.
When nouns consist of four letters, the first having
% the third will take Rukok; as, ] A\vn a word ,
*
)4,.rn a wing. Exceptions are ).n.« 4 darkness , )nni
a hole , ]£;! evening , ornament , /m?V,
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK.
21
If the vowel * be placed on the second letter of
a noun, then the third letter, if it have a vowel, re¬
ceives a Kushoi; hut if it be quiescent, then it takes
Hukok; also, if after this there conies another letter,
it receives Kushoi;
vine, cheese,
a plant, |v> phlegm, a heifer .
A letter, which comes after x , whether it has a
vowel or not, always takes Rukok; as, ],♦. . i m victory ,
work, ^. vn\ ) a disciple; hut if another letter
comes between, then the Le xd—i-o receives Kushoi;
as, }h]s just, Ua a congregation.
If a letter of a noun take p, then the following
one, whether with or without a vowel, has Rukok;
as, good, X*ii fruit.
The letter of a noun which comes after the vowel
*, if it he itself without a vowel, receives a Rukok;
as, beauty, first-born; but if the said
letter has a vowel, then the point attached to it is
Kushoi; as, }i>Z<L» silence.
A letter elided, as there is no compensation by
Dagesh, the elision is indicated by Kushoi; as in verbs,
^ and q_l and their derivatives; as, ^amZZ
for ye will slay.
These points serve for distinguishing several words
which have the same letters and vowels; as,
22
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK.
disgrace has > hard, and pity has 5 soft;
p y
a heap of corn has 5 hard, and }Zo r ^ joy has > soft.
This is also the case with verbs in many instances;
In many words, which have been imported into the
Syriac from the Greek or some foreign language, the
aspirated letters are accustomed to be pronounced in
the same way as they are in that language from which
# y
they are derived; as, .m >cn ]\n 5 y\aixv$ 9
X t
#€ 0 X 070 ?, 1 ,» ^n\ Xa/x 7 rd?: 7 r of the Greeks is in Syriac
represented by ^ and (p by See on this subject
Hoffman’s Grammar, pp. 115, 116. In other places,
besides those which have been mentioned where Kushoi
is found, its usage may be explained by considering it
as analogous to that of Dagesh lene in Hebrew.
According to Amira and the old grammarians,
Kushoi never doubles a letter; but on the other
hand it must be said that the Eastern Syrians in this
respect followed the analogy of the Hebrew: we have
also 'Pafifit, Master , John iii. 2, and in the writings
of St Paul we have ’A/3/3a, Father . If this duplication
be not admitted, then it is important to state that in
such cases where it would be implied, the preceding
7 7
vowel will complete the syllable; thus, tab-bar
or ta-bar.
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, RIBUI.
23
7. Ribui.
Many nouns and verbs have the same form in
both numbers. In such cases it was found necessary
to employ some mark of distinction. For this purpose
Grammarians have invented the sign Ribui (_o^5)
x
consisting of two horizontal* dots (••) placed above the
word, to denote the plural number. The following
words will illustrate the use of this sign.
fcbAl orphan,
book,
« >.cno2] teas covered,
x
7
- » he arrived,
x
libAl orphans.
n\
books.
•• y «
. . ran/ | were covered.
x
••7
they arrived, (fem.)
A plural noun ending in ^ or I has no need
of the sign Ribui; since the number is already in¬
dicated by the termination.
It is sometimes used with a noun of multitude;
o 0
as, a flock of sheep , to distinguish it from
a sheep.
If it be placed over the letter Rish, one of the
points coalesces with the point belonging to Rish;
as, 1 ;o A a herd of oxen .
Prepositions with pronominal affixes referring to
plural nouns receive these points; as, ^oor^ > .
* Ribui is placed obliquely in ^ and thus,
24
LINES.
To this rule there are a few exceptions; as,
and which are never seen with this sign.
The numerals, according to some grammarians, do
not receive the points except when they are joined
to pronominal affixes; as, "(ASZ, v aiLi)Z,
^A^Z.
Besides the name wiool, which is given to these
points, they are also called by native grammarians,
}V) •; m positions , ]^n / drops , and "jv-oaj points.
8. Lines.
A small line is sometimes found above and some¬
times beneath a letter of a word.
It is found above a letter principally in the fol¬
lowing instances,
1 . In abbreviated words; as, ps for ]« .,n holy *
i
2 . When letters are used to express numbers;
13 .
_ — o
3. In the Particle of Exclamation o] Of to
7
distinguish it from the particle ol or.
When it is found beneath a letter, it directs
that such letter is not read, and is therefore generally
called the linea occultans. Thus, Z*i Bath not
Barth , a daughter. It is found,
(l) In nouns with the middle radical doubled;
as, )i i vn Manna , ]1\Z a stag.
~ 'h
7o
* 01 for QJOl that is , occurs frequently in ecclesiastical
writings, and especially in the Commentaries of Ephraim Syrus.
LINES.
25
( 2 ) With Olaph in the beginning of a word
in many instances; as, . - i ] a man,
" x “
another; especially in the pronoun |i], as
'TS
often as it is used in the place of the
substantive verb; as, w w i am.
“ 'IS
(3) With Dolath when it is without a vowel
and placed before Thau; as, 12^*1 new.
(4) With He in the following cases,
{a) In affixes; as . .rn nnVn his kings,
he called him.
(b) In the verb ]ooi was, when it is redun¬
dant, when it is the logical copula, or
when it assists in forming the imperfect
and pluperfect tenses; as, looi ^cnoA.,] he
x
was, ]ocn , he was visiting, ]ocn nos
TS
he had visited. But when it is used in the
sense of to be, to exist, the line is not
found.
(c) In the pronouns oot and ^<n, when they
i
are put for the logical copula; as, ooi
'K
my body is.
(d) In words derived from the Greek, . . vn nm;
X “
Rome .
(e) In the verb he gave.
(5) With uw in when it comes after the
active participle used as a present tense;
as, -j-jd, we create.
26
LINES.
(6) With Lomad in some forms of the verb
^1; as, departing, fern.
is “
v v
(7) With Nun in the four pronouns A/|,
•x v y 0
, ,__»Aj] and in some nouns; as, ] Ai > ^rr>
the ship.
(8) Rish in a daughter.
When a line is found under a letter in a verb
of the imperative mood of a passive conjugation, it
implies that such letter is deprived of its vowel; as,
^guoZ] Ethkatl.
“ n\
9. Marhetono and Mehagyono.
In many words, when two letters come together,
each without a vowel, a line is placed sometimes
above and sometimes below the first of these letters.
In the former case it is called Marhetono ,
making to run from to run ) and in the latter
Mehagyono ( ]i > according to Amira from ]^oi
to meditate; but according to Hoffman and others
from the Arab. to connect; for the two letters by
this sign are connected and make a syllable. These
lines seem to be used only in certain words, and in
the first instance for purposes of poetry. The poetry
of the Syrians, as appears from the specimens which
remain, (see for instance the hymns of Ephraim,) con¬
sisted in having a certain number of syllables in a
line; and hence it woidd be convenient, in many cases.
MARHETONO AND MEHAGYONO.
27
to give to some words an additional syllable. To in¬
dicate this addition, a line was put beneath the first
of the two letters without a vowel, which had the
force generally of Revotso, but occasionally of Pethocho;
as, i- e. a ring; i. e. fear.
When this additional syllable is in such words not
required to complete the measure, the Marhetono is
written, and denotes that its letter and the following
have no vowels. It corresponds to the Sheva in He¬
brew, except that the latter is employed according to
general rules, whilst the former is used only in par¬
ticular words, and in these words only under certain
circumstances. Grammarians, however, are not fully
agreed as to the primary use and signification of these
lines, and it is not now of much consequence, if we
cannot make ourselves fully acquainted with them.
It is supposed, by some persons, that the Mehagyono
is found only when the following letter is 5 ^;
but to these, others add <n, others oj, and others
o ]. Again, whether every word which has one
line, must, in a different situation, have the other;
or whether some words have only one of the lines
and others only the other, it is impossible to say,
and happily it is not important to determine. Who¬
ever is curious to know more of this subject, may
have his curiosity satisfied by consulting the chapter
on these lines in the Syriac Grammar of Sciadrensis, in
p. .
28
OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS.
10. Other Diacritic Points.
It has been stated, in page 8, that a point was
sometimes used which, by its position either above or
below the word, would determine the true pronunciation
and meaning; when without it and without the vowel
points, it would be ambiguous: thus, anil for cnX to
p
him; ai^ for oi^ to her. It is also frequently used
as a note of Interrogation, Exclamation, Admiration,
Command, &c. For a further account of the various
offices which this point performs, see the Appendix.
There are also certain signs for marking the end
of a sentence, and subdividing it into clauses, of which
the following are the principal.
(1) At the end of a period are found four points
(•:•) or
(2) Two points placed obliquely from the right
hand towards the left, finish a clause,
and are equivalent to our colon ; thus,
•]«^ ]]_kj p When Jesus
i.
saw the multitudes.
These points are sometimes put as a sign
of interrogation.
(3) Two points placed obliquely from the left
hand to the right, thus (•*), split the clause
into different members, and are equivalent
OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS.
29
to our comma or semicolon. They are fre¬
quently placed perpendicularly (•').
These points are sometimes found after a
long interrogation, see Matt. xii. 10.
(4) One point frequently ends a period.
11. On the Pronunciation of certain Letters when they are
under peculiar circumstances.
These letters are differently pronounced in different
situations. Olaph is pronounced as Yud,
(1) When it is preceded by another Olaph; as,
5]j oyar 9 air.
(2) When it is followed by another Olaph with-
00
out a vowel; as, ]|lk) m'loyo 9 fulness.
(3) When it is the second letter of the par¬
ticiple peal; as, io] l tso-yem, fasting.
Vau is pronounced as v when it begins a word or
syllable; as, o va 9 o ve, o vi: in other places it has
'fS ,x
the sound of u or w.
Yud in the beginning of a word with the vowel
1 is not pronounced. It preserves only the sound of
its vowel; as, Inek 9 lie sucked; Ikar 9 lie was
'TS X I
heavy. Hence we find that before a Yud of that kind
Olaph is sometimes placed, and the vowel belonging
to the Yud is transferred to the Olaph; thus, a
X
hand 9 from the Hebrew T, is written 1^1. The pro¬
nunciation of either word is the same.
30
ACCENT.
1 when followed by Rukok, or ^ either with a
p
Rukok or Kushoi, is pronounced like je; as, Uv^
gestho , wool; s'/co, he conquered. Some persons
add that i is so pronounced when ^ comes after it;
as, s'kifo , a cross; & when followed by one of
the letters j is pronounced like y; as,
chezdo, mercy; . » A%gi, 1 will multiply. If Z
with a Rukok come after ^ or each of these
letters has the force of ; as, rehtho , lust;
IAjdiZ* ezhtho, a ring.
12. Accent.
Grammarians have given a few rules for placing
the Accent.
1 . In words of two syllables, if the first sylla¬
ble terminate in a consonant without a vowel, this
syllable has the accent; as, Rdm-sho, evening;
gar mo, hone .
2. If on the contrary the final letter of the word
be without a vowel, then the accent is put on the
second syllable; as, jX I-led , he begat; Po-lced,
visiting. Should each syllable be formed in that man¬
ner, then each is affected with the accent; as, l 7 cx*
Pek-ddth , she has visited.
3 . In words consisting of more than two syllables,
the accent is generally placed on the penultimate; as,
METHOD OF EXPRESSING NUMBERS.
31
Po-rdch-tho , bird; ]A^gld]1d Me-kultho , meat;
'TS
y ; (n Marth-yo-nu-tho , admonition.
13. The method of expressing Numbers.
This is done by the letters and by the assistance
of a few marks. Numbers of any magnitude may be
expressed, as in the following Table.
1
3
•
or
0
1
OJ
4.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
«—t
^0
J
s£D
Vi
%£)
S
J2>
•
or 1
•
•
•
3
•
•
01
9
0
•
1
9
9
4
•
WJ
10
20
30
40
50
6 o
70
80
90
100
•
5
z
•
©
^0
•
J
%£D
•
vi
•
•
<>
200
300
400
500
6 00
700
800
900
, 1
1000
\
2000
&c.
i 10,000
^2) :
20,000
&c.
Fractions
are
written thus,
1 i
2
1
A
| &C.
If it be required to add a smaller number to a
greater, that is, to express a number consisting of units,
tens, hundreds, &c. the letter indicating the greater is
put on the right hand of that indicating the less; thus,
235.
14. Heading Exercises.
Matth. VI. 9—13.
7 7
m.'fs o • • y % • 0 y y + o y •• y **
joou \L\L 4 ^ v ao|
'Ti I
1 0 -7 .7 7 P «s7 *0 •• 7 * p o *7 p p -n
^ v^cn . siZ)| (jl,q .j
32
READING EXERCISES.
I P ^ P 7 .7 7-7 .7 9 s P -P 07 JO 9 .
? f.i a. ( ^-x^o-Ka ^ x_oq_cl_»o .(.iV)Q^ i mom;
P 7 P P -X 7 7 P — 7 p 7 7 7
VI l in x ra i \ ^ Vo - ^ O X XX V, Qn • _jlk»
p * o 7 p * y o *. »
]IujOO..»Zo (i-i—KiO lZon\V? w_.cn ^.Ijd ,_Sd
7\ X X 71 I 7*
.^x-lnli ioSil
X
The same in English Characters .
A-bun dvash-ma-yo neth-ka-dash sh’moc. Ti-the
mal-cu-thoc neh-ve tsev-yo-noc ai-ka-no d’vash-ma-yo
oph bar-bo. Hav lan lach-mo d’sun-ko-nan yau-mo-no.
Vash-buk lan chau-bain ai-ka-no doph ch’nan sh’vakn
l’cha-yo-bain. V’lo tba-lan l’nes-yu-no e-lo pa-tson
men bi-sho me-tul d’di-loc hi mal-cu-tho v’chai-lo
v’thesh-buch-tho 1’olam ol-min.
Luke XXII. 63 — 65 .
7 7 -X .7 . 7.^7
CTLO 0001 v i. ^Q.« > \ 0001 ,.n
» " i » ii
•• 7 . f. 7 . 7 -T> P . 7 77
W_|01QJ2>| OlA 0001 ,OlA 0001 . x » . X Vnn
“7 ^ "* ^ 71
p •• o 7 o o •• P 7 0 *X 7 p 7 p
]Z1 i.,^-CQ lAj-J^lo o lV) ]jqjZ| ^r^l 0
.w_.aioZLl _.^d]o oocn » <=> 1 , .. Vn
- v
The same in English Characters.
V’gav-re da-chi-din vau l’ye-shu m’-vaz-chin vau beh,
vam-cha-pen vau leh. V’mo-chen vau leh al a-pau
vom-rin eth-na-bo ma-nu m'choc vach-ron-yo-tho
za-gi-yo-tho m’gad-pin vau vom-rin a-lau.
NOUNS.
15. The simplest forms of nouns are those which
consist only of the letters composing the root; as,
king, sacrifice. Such words are evidently
ns ns
in their primitive state.
The augmented forms will consist of the root
augmented by one or more of the letters ] o ^ j Z,
which to assist the memory may he called wAjoAd) #
i ns
Thus, ooirk) an altar from sacrifice;
* X
disciple from r VnX he learned.
ns
These letters are probably abbreviations of words,
and the signification of them qualifies that of the
primitive word to which they are united.
Nouns having (-) with the first radical, and (©1)
with the second, are generally nouns signifying persons;
as, |kxi^5 a friend; whilst those having (ol) with
the first radical, or ending in o\ Zo-, ]Zo x , are ab¬
stract nouns; as, holiness , ^ strength.
Two words are sometimes compounded in sense;
as, jl^ uL a voice. Sometimes the two words are
joined together; as, lord of enmity, i. e. an
ns
3
34
NOUNS.
enemij. A great number of compound words occurring
in Scripture may be found by referring to the Lexicons
p y
of Schaaf and Castell under the words ]lo| , ,
Aj-D, 1;io, ^5, &C.
'h 'fs y x
16 . Gender.
There are two genders, the masculine and feminine.
Of the masculine are,
(1) The names of men and their offices; as,
jxcldqJ^ Luke , ]j<tud priest, ]”Sd| musicians.
‘Is
(2) Names of nations, rivers, and mountains; as.
Canaan , ,_j? 5 cL Jordan.
Of the feminine gender are the names of women,
the offices of women, countries, cities, and names of
the double members of the human body.
The feminine gender of nouns is also known by
the termination. These terminations are )] o] v_», L \
x
as, ml praise , on . [ goodness , ^oL confession ,
‘is I
Aik) a part. The nouns not ending with any of
the foregoing letters, and not included in the preceding
paragraph, are generally masculine.
Nouns consisting of two syllables, and beginning
with a if the first of these syllables have v, then
in becoming feminine they add another v to the letter
which is next but one before Z; as, ) I \ fern.
NOUNS.
35
]AjJLLlo high , ] fem. ]/\ ^ A « vp praised,
]A ; Avn fem. ]An - blessed.
Nouns which begin and end with Zekofo, and
which consist of four letters, when they become femi¬
nine, take Revotso upon the second letter, provided
that one of the letters is not a guttural; as, a
father , fem. a mother. But if the noun contain
a guttural letter, then the Revotso is changed into
Pethoclio; as, fem. an acquaintance, fem.
a limit.
Nouns which begin with Zekofo and terminate in
, when they become feminine take Chevotso upon
the second letter; as, fem. ]2 Lcl» worthy,
X
fem. flowing.
i
But if they begin with Pethocho and end in ]_*,
when they become feminine they take Chevotso upon
the second letter and cast away the Pethocho from
the first; as, f em - ]A . o ^ elected.
Nouns ending with Zekofo only, and having Pe¬
thocho on the first letter, when they become feminine
change the Pethocho from the first letter to the second;
as, fem. companion: hing, fem.
. and a few others do not observe this rule.
The feminine gender of adjectives is derived from
the masculine by the addition of *j to the end of
the latter; thus, ]^l good from ^ masc. Those
3—2
36
NOUNS.
ending in ^ quiescent convert it into ^ moveable;
as, . . pure , fem.
A few adjectives insert Yud immediately before the
fem. termination; as, 5aLi small, fem. Vo
-TV
obedient, fem. ] 1 i \infm Vr> .
T\
Some nouns are used in both genders, and are therefore
termed common; such as, ]^ m\ tongue , ]n\ cloud , &c.
" 7 »
The rules indeed for distinguishing gender are for the
most part the same as in Hebrew. The same words, when
occurring in both, have the same gender ; as, *1SD and
. look, UV and day, are masc.; and
* _ o y
earth , 1033 and j « o\ i soul, are fem.
Words derived from the Greek do not observe the
foregoing rules, but generally retain their own gender; as,
WU? SiaOijKri, fem.
i i x
17. Number.
There are two numbers, the singular and the plural.
Masculine nouns make the plural number, 1st. by
adding ^ to the singular; as, man, men:
2nd. those words ending in ] or ^ throw away the
n\
"j or and the termination is added; as, boy ,
» boys; plu. reprobated .
'fs " 7 >
Nouns of the fem. gender form the plural by
changing the termination ] into o* and t into
NOUNS.
37
^6, and v_. into _»; as, ] i . ship, i > ships;
^ X T\ X
similitude , ^aSoj similitudes; AjlLo portion, ^qaId portions;
•a
vjl-o? usury, in the plural » o * -
i ^
p »x
Nouns which terminate in ]Zo, when they become
plural, change x into e placed on the Van; as, l2o_o5
multitude , plu. multitudes. A few nouns besides
the p take 7 on the second letter; as, plu.
l2ds^ prayers; ]2oj-k> hip, plu. ]2o,Lk» . Others, instead
of 7 take * upon the first letter; as, iZoi? likeness,
plu. }Lo±o >.
Nouns consisting of three, four, and five syllables,
and terminating in lA-i* change the _» x into 1 when
they become plural; as, usury, plu.
Nouns which begin with 7 and end with Yud and
Aleph with the vowel p, and which consist of four
letters, in the plural transfer 7 from the first to the
second letter; as, ]» o ^ elect, plu. ). o ^
Nouns having p on the first letter and ending with
U, in the plural receive the vowel 7 upon the letter
immediately preceding ; thus, Lord, plu. |Z;1 d .
Those nouns which commence with a Mem and
have 7 either upon the first or second radical, in the
plural receive 7 on the letter immediately preceding
Yud; as, ) I VmVn reprobated, plu. ]1 S.,cn^n .
Feminine nouns consisting of three, four, and five
letters, which end in Z hard, and have p upon the
38
NOUNS.
letter before Yud, in the plural add another p to the
Yud ; thus, ] A > i A n* spiritual, plu. ]A > i An? .
There are many other changes of vowels which
nouns undergo in passing from the sing, to the plu.,
which will be more particularly noticed in treating on
the const, and def. states.
p
Feminine nouns terminating in in the plu.
between the root and termination, insert either -»; as,
> place , plu. 1 Also 5 ; 1 2.5ail small , plu. ill5ail ;
or o, either in the masc. or fern, gender; as, ]Ajs
a companion , plu. ]Zois; ]Asoo| a nation , plu. IZaioj.
There are nouns in which <n is inserted in like man-
P T* 0 p
ner; as, ps| mother , plu. "jAnioi.
Many of the Syriac nouns have the masculine form
p
in the sing, and fern, in the plural; as, 'physician,
'Ti
plu. ; jiciaA throne,
P 7 •>
^acoias.
There are others which have the fern, form in the
sing, and masc. in the plural; as, ]io] 7 ell, plu. . Vr> ] 7 ;
x
wall, plu. ; ] AvVr> > tear, plu. ; 1*ss talent ,
7l *Ti ^ *t\ T\
plu. ; |_l_» year , plu.
^ I X
Nouns compounded of two words sometimes admit a
«. p p •• y
plural in the former; as, |» i » i o sons of man or men;
sometimes in the latter; as, |nn , \vn enemies; and some¬
phi. ^aiy;
place.
times in both; as, |1 o A i_s> (daughters of words) words ,
fables.
NOUNS.
39
Some nouns are found in the plural form only; as,
] > Vn * heavens, life, ] 1 Vo water.
as
Some nouns have a double form, one masc. and the
other fern.; such as, father, plu. and
x
There are other nouns which are very irregular ; as,
liool nation, plu. ^ 0 ^ 0 ).
as
Many words of a Greek origin retain the Greek ter¬
mination in the plural; as, Soy/ua, plu
Soy/uLctra. Others terminate in *cdo] , soo, *co1, or sq,
resembling the termination a? of the Greek accusative
plural; as, )n . A o ^laOrjKrj, plu. soclo. >A_o SiaOqKas, &c.
X XI xx
18. States of Nouns.
To the absolute and constructive state of nouns,
which the Hebrews have, the Syrians add a third,
the Definite , or, as it has been more generally called,
the Emphatic. This is indicated by the termination,
and is equivalent in general to the article n before
a Hebrew noun. It happens however that the primary
signification of this state has been departed from in
many instances, and nouns are found in the def. state
when only an indef. sense is intended to be expressed.
The rules for passing from one state to another depend
either upon the gender, the number, or the final letter,
or on more than one of these. First for
19. Masculine Nouns.
In the singular number the absolute and con¬
structive states are the same.
40
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
The definite state is obtained by the addition of
] to the end of the absolute. Hence the definite
state of masculine nouns and the absolute state of
feminine nouns have the same form.
Those nouns ending in 1 in the absolute state,
in the definite the "j is changed into ]_».
The constructive state, plural number, is formed by
y
changing the termination ^ of the absolute into _
X
and ^ into . . .
The def. plu. is formed from the absolute by chang¬
ing the termination ^ into ] and ^ into this
i 'h 'h
and the preceding rules will he illustrated by some
examples, which will presently follow.
To ascertain the changes of vowels which nouns
undergo in their different states of both numbers; or,
which is the same thing, given the abs. state sing. num.
to find the vowels and their position in the constr. and
def. states for both numbers.
1st. If a word consist of three consonants and a
vowel on the second consonant, which is the case with
a very large class of nouns, this form is equivalent to
one of the old forms of segolate nouns in Hebrew. In
Syriac these forms are i. the alternate form of
which is ^40 or ^4o. n. ^40 alt. ^^40 or ^40.
^ 'TS IS
hi. ^q4o alt. Now whenever the noun in its
primitive form receives a syllabic augment, the alternate
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
41
t
form is used; thus, man, def. We have
therefore only to add the proper termination to the
alternate form to obtain the def. state sing, or the abs.
const, and def. states plural*. Thus,
Singular.
Def.
Abs. and Constr.
7
Ir^-*
7
morning
1
1; ^.CP
'TS
;Aco
book
2
•
servant
3
'Ti
wing
4
):^i
]jQ-»
captive
5
*
bO(La_^
body.
6
Plural.
Def.
w
'h
Constr.
y v
Abs.
7
X
mornings
1
]j_2UCD
T\
i^CO
X ^
books
2
is
7 7
•
7
X
servants
3
]<=^ vn
‘T* 'h
u^in
I 7\
wings
4
7 7
^,ru
*71
captives
5
7 *
bodies.
6
Exception. In the vowel remains
IS
and def. states plural.
in its place
in the
42
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
1. In the foregoing examples, that which is marked
(l) comprehends all those nouns having v on the second con¬
sonant, and remitting it to the first in the process of inflexion;
such are . body , . v dust , ^£>1 time , beard.
2. In the second example, we have those nouns which
take v in the second consonant, but in inflexion it is changed
to ^ and remitted to the first. The truth is, the vowel * is
the proper vowel in both places, and the reason of the change
is that in such nouns the last letter is a guttural or Rish.
3. In the third example are included those nouns whose
forms are and ; such are ..\vr> king, ^oj.. bone,
'ts tn 'rs Vi
Wvn husband, anathema , . m soul.
4. The fourth example belongs to that class of nouns
whose forms are and
7 \
5. Nouns having the third radical Olaph, take the forms
which are exhibited in the example jrx#; but manifest,
covered, have their definite forms )_1\^ ]. mn . ]1 1
boy, makes in the def. plu. as if from the obsolete
'h
word . . S l ; we have likewise ] »Vn i as if from )vn « .
6. All nouns of the forms ^>q_£uQ and ^£q_o are repre¬
sented by the sixth example.
o y
herb , def. may be considered as belonging to
the same class of nouns as The Yud has Chevotso ,
because this letter is never without a vowel when it begins
a word. If the last consonant be a guttural or Rish, it is
preceded by the vowel Pethocho instead of Revotso ; as,
month , heap of stones.
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
43
Such nouns as eye, day , correspond to the
i
Hebrew segolate nouns. In these the vowel is changed
into ? in the def. state sing., and all the states plu.,
and this new vowel makes a diphthong with o or
thus,
Singular.
Def.
Abs. and Constr.
\ 0 7
4
eye.
I
tea:
Plural.
•X
i>OQ_* day.
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
y y
7
T\
X
y y
7
SOQ-j days.
X
2nd. Other classes of nouns
are the following.
1. Such nouns
inflexion; thus,
as admit no
Singular.
change of vowels
Def.
Abs. and Constr.
X
Plural.
> • i evil.
X
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
1\ I
7
I
X X
The vowel Zekofo is immutable, and therefore mono¬
syllables with this vowel are represented by . « . ; as, A £Vp
x
portion, book. Nouns also having two or more sylla-
44
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
bles, if the penultimate terminate in a consonant, or if the
ultimate syllable be perfect without the terminating conso-
y y y
nant, belong to this class; as, explanation, , »Vn\ 7
disciple. Some nouns wanting an absolute state may be re¬
ferred to it; as, |L»*j the stag , j_>5] the lion , the ser¬
pent, )lo& death , ]oAid winter, K conversation , for
the form of the definite state remains in all the parts of
their inflexion. Finally, nouns which possess either of the fol¬
lowing forms preserve their vowels immutable, viz. . . \n x (\ r>
def. ] 1 \o f\ o 7 \\ > j\ n def. ]1 . (p n. A few nouns appear
i x
to correspond with the segolate nouns in Hebrew, but which
really belong to this class ; as, A,» carcase , 5o_l] small.
magician.
2 . Monosyllables, the vowel of which is v or %
nouns of many syllables, the last of which is mutable,
are exemplified in the following Table.
Singular.
Def.
Abs. and Constr.
U
v!
-A
species
0 0
pouD
l CTLD
'ft
Priest
Plural.
7 -X
Path.
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
nil
7
^-J1
I
species
jjCTUD
7 P
w_k_jai2
v .j-JCrLD
I
Priests
'Ts
7 -X
I
Paths.
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS.
45
The noun son , makes in the plural » i sons;
x
as if it were derived from a different root. Also - is
peculiar in receiving the consonant oi in the plural ;
thus, , ^C7li£L* , ]ots2l» .
X
3. Nouns of more than one syllable, terminating
in Olaph or Yud may constitute another class. Such
are,
Singular.
Def.
Plural.
Abs. and Constr.
seen
‘Ts
7 7
drunlc.
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
^ 0 7 7
7 7
ns
0 7 7
V»A.«So
7 7
7
LjkSo .
A few nouns double the last letter in the plural;
but the linea occultans is placed under the first of
the two letters ; thus, ^al sea , plu. »v>v>' . ;
X
]SqLq£, plu. of people , is also another instance.
IS -
20. States of Feminine Nouns.
In the singular number, the constructive state
changes ] of the absolute into 2 ; thus, ]jl» year, AjL® .
46
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.
Nouns which in the absolute state terminate in
cT or in the constructive end in Lo or ; as, qdi
i x
victory , constr. Za£i; - . ^4 usury , constr. A > ^
I 'h x
Fern, nouns having a masc. termination; as,
* 7 *
belly; those ending in L\ as, Aivn 'portion; make the
abs. and constr. states the same.
The definite state of fern, nouns which have a
masc. termination is the same as that of masc. nouns;
as, belly, def. jroji).
In the def. state the } of the abs. is changed into
p
12; as, ]ho word, def. l‘A\vn.
If the word in the abs. state terminate in ,
the Yud becomes quiescent in the def. state, and
the preceding consonant takes 1 ; if the termination
in the abs. be ]o, then Van becomes quiescent in x
in the def. Ex. 4, 5.
Nouns ending in o or make the def. by the
i
addition of ]2; those ending in 2 add only ] in the
def. 6, 7, 8, 9.
To avoid the concourse of several consonants
without a vowel, or, which is the same thing, to
facilitate the pronunciation, a vowel, namely y or
is placed with the second or third radical; as, lllojj
c 7 V
widow, def. lA\vnV| .
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.
47
A few nouns ending in ^ in the abs. masc., in the
def. state fem. assume x under the Nun, which is
followed by ; as, def. fem. com -
x x
forter .
In the plural number the constr. state is derived
from the abs. by changing the final ^ into L, and
the def. is derived from the abs. by changing . into
12 .
The Examples in the following Table will fur¬
ther illustrate what has been here said on the states
of fem. nouns.
Singular.
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
]AXoAn
A^oAn
yoAo
virgin
1
0 P
7 p
O P
V
chariot
£
o 7
7 7
p 7
companion
3
X
&1H
U24
girl
4
0 -X 7
)Ln i .>j
7 7
o 7
1C1.IL.JJ
beast
5
0 *x
1Zq_o5
is
i.ao?
'h
•X
'A
ten thousand, or
a myriad 6
P *X p
•X P
•X P
a^>
division
7
1A^3
I 71
Aj_£D3
X 7%
I
usury
8
p p
]L\Sa
AiSo
AjAd
portion
9
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.
48
Plural.
Def.
Constr.
Abs.
0 0 «X
0 «X
AXoA^
o *X
virgins
1
0 0 o
P 0
0 o
chariots
2
op y
P 7
Zfj£l>0
e ■ y
companions
3
o t y
AA^
girls
4
op 7
}Ln »
o 7
Zo > K)
P 7
beasts
5
0 0
lZa^5
“Ts
Zao3
^ao3
myriads
6
o o 7o
P 7 P
Zo^
o 7 0
divisions
7
]Aj_o5
'h
AZ..o3
'Ts
usuries
8
p p V
]2n ^ Vn
P 7
Zn i Vn
p 7
portions
9
1. In
No. l, we have
an example of those
nouns
ending in ]
which undergo no change
of vowels in
their
different states; such are, ] m
» o m7. ]
X
v » ^ an eaa ,
X
m. 0 *x
circumcision.
2. Nouns which assume an additional vowel in the
def. state singular.
3. This example represents nouns in which the vowel
on the 1st. rad. of the abs. sing, is removed to the 2nd.
rad. in the def. They partake of the character of segolate
nouns in Hebrew.
4. 5. In these examples we have nouns whose termi¬
nations are and ]o. A few nouns belonging to the latter
cast away the vowel of the 1st. rad. in the def. state sing.;
as, blow , def.
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.
49
6. This is an example of nouns ending in o > which
preserve their vowels unchanged, and in which no new vowel
is introduced; as, n .\ .. liberty , n!ni equality , o A
7. Nouns represented by o are such as receive
another vowel in the plu., viz. v or *, which is placed on
the 2nd rad.; as, o i prophecy , Q.. 1 AX 0 war.
i
8. This is the model of nouns the abs. state of which
ends in In the plural Yud quiescent is changed into
i
Yud moveable.
9. In the nouns represented by A i v> we have in the
plural 2 taken away and o moveable placed before the plural
termination; such are, A\v sacrifice , A_kk£0 ablution.
In some instances the last letter is written twice in the
plural; as, 0= bride, plu.
There are some anomalies; as, praise , )A_^ o A
in the def.; sister , plu. def.
21. The Syrians have no cases which are marked
by terminations; but the nominative and oblique cases
of the Greeks and Latins are known by the context, or
are expressed by the constructive state, by the influence
of a transitive verb, or by some particle; as, ^ j o ^
Za2L ^-lo, &c. preceding; thus,
ns
Aj k\ d 1 . Jesus departed.
ns
IolISv JLld words of God; or, ]ctl2A |ISd words of
' I> »\ T\
God.
4
50
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS.
}nVo\ to the king , to Jesus , ) 1 to
the blind man.
we have seen his glory , lor^L
]vn\v\ God loved the world. Sometimes we see tL
in imitation of the Hebrew ns'- See Gen. i. 1.
o V — o
1ZAj| o] 0/ woman. See also Acts i. 1.
with the king , &c.
If one of the letters ^ j o ^ be prefixed to a noun,
the first radical of which is ] or then the prefix
receives the vowel which the ] or previously had;
as, w a brother , Wa, X r > V » a son,
XX XI
I I
When one of these letters is prefixed to a word
consisting of three letters, and especially of those which
p 7
end in two Olaphs, it takes the vowel as, "jjloo
o 7
with a hundred , 1^00 and a hundred. But this rule
is not observed in other words which are not composed
of three letters and do not terminate in two Olaphs.
Again, should all the letters o j id be placed
before any word, if the first of these prefixes he with¬
out a vowel the second will have one; also, the third
will he without, and the fourth with a vowel, as we
see, for instance, in the noun ] AVn a word; for we
say and .
ADJECTIVES.
51
Adjectives.
22. The Syriac adjectives are few, but this defect
is supplied by other words, which when placed in cer¬
tain positions obtain the use and signification of adjec¬
tives. For instance, the state of construction will supply
the force of an adjective; as, ]_®?clo Ai city of holi-
ness, i. e. holy city, Matth. iv. 5. Also a substantive
put absolutely with ? prefixed; as, . « si i ? a natural
body , 00 O 33 a spiritual body , 1 Cor. xv. 44. Also
in other ways; as, the fire, jiij 11 ? which is not extin¬
guished, i. e. inextinguishable; ^clL *£)jj ^qjoi
. . 1 . J) m they to whom he shewed himself alive,
- 7 \
lit. ( 1 as living.)
Adjectives are distinguished by gender, number and
states, which are the same as in the substantives. It
is only necessary to notice that in adjectives the
masc. def. and the fern. abs. have the same form;
but they are easily known one from the other by
the substantive or the verb with which they are
connected. The degrees of comparison are not to be
found in a change of the adjective, but are merely
marked by certain particles and connections.
The comparative is expressed by the positive con¬
strued with either preceding or following it; as,
'h
ooi fo greater than all: there is sometimes
4—2
52
ADJECTIVES.
added .o l powerfully , or more ; as, \A .;l*o
i i
cnho as i ; (Y»^rr> ^ *^-4” and sharper than a
^ T\ TS
two-edged sword , lit. much sharper. Blessed
is lie who gives lU ^ won 9 than he
d i
who receives. The comparative is sometimes marked
by the sense of the passage only; as, "joau
/ 7\ 'TS I
]i ov |\ y ] t _CLL the elder shall he servant to the younger .
The superlative is often formed by the duplication
of the positive ; as, W» \o V\ . Vn least; sometimes
I X
by adding the particle v.ery 9 which is equivalent
to the *1^0 of the Hebrews ; as, U- Vo worst ,
'T) X
plu.; sometimes again by m uch; as, ^..^co
}7 . AI vn most honoured; or by vD prefixed to the
plural; as, |n\vnn ] small among kings , i. e.
» f
the least of kings; or as, _^oct5q_ii least of
7i X ^
the Apostles , literally, least of those who {are) the
Apostles; or it is expressed in the following man¬
ner; whosoever therefore shall break one jj r oo^
'Ts ‘7s
Ijq-LI of these least commandments. Matth. v.
'h T\
19; see also two other places in this verse.
Many adjectives are formed by the addition of 1_T
to the words from which they are derived; thus,
] > Co «n ^ corporeal , mountainous , primi¬
tive ; so also adjectives having a Greek origin ; as,
NUMERALS.
53
^ o P 7
Ur^'r^
P P 7 p
barbarous , un aerial. In some instances the
termination ]j is added to the primitive word to form
the adjective; as, |_i_*__,3 primary , hairy , "\.
X
proper .
23. Numerals.
Numerals are either cardinal (j( \ » - • ^ ) r or ordinal
i
QA.;
Ordinal.
Cardinal.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
. P. P 7
IA-a.Vvq
1 > V),-Q first
•
7
r _Ki OW0
•
Constr.
I
* P D 7 •
(±_»3A second
^Z;Z y _,Z>Z y
>Z ^-^Z two
*7\
1LLAZ
X
1-.AjAZ third
i
ASZ
1AHZ
m. P 0
|A
X
. p p b
| » v » oi fourth
i
«C»V
« P «7
p^3 1 /owr
X
| > a» > Ki,
X
7
'A
(.» SOjvj five
}LL.£l.
X
V»zLiA_»
X
Aj* ]a_*1
'it as **
or ]A_» six
lAC.o.
X
•.0 0
|-*-N i *"i • seventh
X
MrL»
1 p 7
( \n,j> seven
.w
I
1 a 1 » V>Z eighth
i
LaoZ
j.» 1 V)Z
1A. v.
X
»Z ninth
X
M4.Z
IL»Z m»<?
T\
t->; >.cn\
1 ;.CQ. S ten.
H
54
NUMERALS.
From ten to twenty the numbers one, two, &c. are
prefixed to ten, in the following manner:
Cardinal •
Fem.
Masc.
is IS
7 7
eleven
fcm&SZ
Is is
jXQ^iZ
is
twelve
is is
■Ju&LL
thirteen
y y
Is is is
dul&d
is
7 7 *7
fourteen
. 7 7
is is
7 7 -A 7
;fnlA.. a AnM
7 7 7
^ULL^LQ-^j
fifteen
lym-iZLa
is is
y y A
sixteen
lym vA «
7 7 p
♦.m vAo *
7 7
• m •
seventeen
IS is
];Tnvi Vi7
Is IS
7 7 0.
r cnM VnZ
eighteen
V.mSaZ
is is
■Jn^LaL
7 7 .
• m v » /
nineteen.
Ordinal.
Fem.
Masc.
•
X
*0 P 7
•
X
eleventh
p o y y
|A-»i_»»CD_LZ5Z
X
p p
]. ravv7
x ^
twelfth
oo y o
i
DO y p
"U^^ullA^Z
X
thirteenth.
&c.
&c.
The law for deriving them from the cardinal is suffi¬
ciently obvious.
NUMERALS.
55
Cardinal numbers from three are for the most part
joined to the thing numbered by Apposition in the abso¬
lute state; as, . . four months , ; rr>v
i
ten virgins. But the constructive state is occasionally
used; thus in Matth. iv. 25, we have ]Ar » r Vn / ; m\ ten
x n\
cities , literally, a decad of cities.
These numbers are frequently found to occupy the
place of ordinals. In Luke i. 59, we have |_LlLoZj
the day which {is) eighth, i. e. the eighth day, . \« A_»
x
sixth hour.
Denary numbers from 20 to 90 are expressed in the
plural, and are of the common gender; thus, > ;vm v twenty,
i n\
thirty , forty, fifty, sixty,
x i x i
» vn • seventy, eighty, . v * 7 ninety.
x x i
The ordinals are derived from these by adding the
termination for the masculine, and for the femi¬
nine ; as, masc. fern. twentieth.
X X TS
The remaining numerals are, a hundred,
n\
two hundred, three hundred, &c., which are form¬
ed by prefixing the less number of the feminine gender
before Also, or <35 thousand, fern.
'Ts
plu. l q n i ten thousand.
X ■»
Twice, thrice, &c. are sometimes expressed by cardinals,
with the noun A ) time, after it; as, once, lit.
one time.
56
NUMERALS.
Words denoting a part of the whole are, ]A\oZ a
third part , a fourth part , : rn vLn a tenth , &c.
Multiples, as double, treble, &c. are expressed by r ^t,
and a cardinal number following with ^ prefixed, or
sometimes without it; as, ^ seven fold , lit. owe
in or into seven , ^32 jLo double.
The days of the week are, I ^ ,_2» first day of
the week, I ^ . 37 second day , &c.
PRONOUNS.
24. Pronouns are sometimes separable , i. e. con¬
sist of words, and sometimes inseparable , i. e. they are
expressed by certain particles called affixes placed at
the end of nouns, verbs, or other particles. The
following is a Table of the personal pronouns.
Plural.
Singular.
Fem.
Com. Masc.
Fem.
Com. Masc.
7
We
7, ls£ person
rOAjl
You
^AjI
7
AjI
Thou , 2w<i.
is
^QJOl |
4
They
cjGI I
x 1
p 1
w-aGHI
ocn
► She
7
OOl
.
- He, 3rd.
ocn and w»cn are also used for the demonstrative
pronouns; as, ocri H that man , ^or that
woman.
^ojI and are for the most part found after
n\
a transitive verb; as, v a3l n ^qjoi they hare filled
•71 -71
them> John ii. 9-
* In the recently discovered Syriac version of the Theophania
of Eusebius there is found the pronominal form we. Heb.
The forms ^QJOI and «^_*2lcn also occur for ^QJOl and ^ .Aar
58
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
25.
The Demonstrative
Pronouns.
1?OT
o 1
TS
f this ,
fem.
> this ,
masc.
•s 0 0
l?ai |
+.0 0
(jcn J
iAcn j
•X 0
* QJCTI
these ,
masc
^ v 1
> these ,
of both genders.
\
0
x.1 ]
r _uJcn
these ,
fem.
-7l
These become reciprocal by being joined to the
personal pronouns ; as, oai he himself \ ]jcn ^<n
x
she herself.
|ioi and coalesce with ooi and ^ci, and then
x
we have the following compounds, qjcti this is , masc.
_>cn jicn this is , fern.
26. The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns.
The relative is ? of both genders and numbers,
and is prefixed to words. It is probably the same
as the iEthiopic H> which in Hebrew has the same
use and signification as W or
o m v
The interrogatives are,
of the person o _lSd, who?
of the thing ,_Sd, }ik>, what?
y *x y
is of both genders and numbers. n i Vn is com-
y *x y y y y *x y
pounded of and ooi; as, .. .m o i . a oik ooA-s qjlLd,
n\
who hath opened his eyes ? lit. who is he, who hath , opened for
him his eyes ?
AFFIXES.
59
Interrogatives of both person and thing are li.,] 7
masc. Ip*] 7 fem. who , which , what ? of the sing, numb.,
and > V . f ? who , which , what ? of the plural.
a
When > is used with these interrogatives, they
become relatives; as, he who goeth not
a
up , ]£o th e bear which he saw.
X
y
Care must be taken not to confound with the
preposition ^ Before the use of vowels the former word
A
was written with a point above the Lo, and the latter
i- «• with a point below the said letter.
27. The following Table exhibits what are called
pronominal affixes , which are added to the end of
nouns. They are certain abbreviated terminations or
inseparable particles, and have the signification of pos¬
sessive pronouns.
Plural.
Singular.
1-1
com. gender.
my
t—»
com. gender.
my
7
masc.
thy
P
Y
masc.
thy
7
fem.
thy
A
fem.
thy
7
«—iCno
masc.
his
01
A
masc.
his
0~L_»
A
fem.
her
P
Ol
fem.
her
7
com.
our
7
com.
our
•X 7
masc.
your
•X
masc.
your
V
fem.
your
A
fem.
your
•X 7
<OOT_»
masc.
their
v odi
masc.
their
7
^Cn-4
fem.
their
r _»01
fem.
their.
60
AFFIXES.
28. There are separate possessive pronouns. They
are expressed by the letters which are put before
x
the affixes; thus, my, thy, masc.; . »
X I 7\ X
thy, fem.; his, oilLj her, our, . nn\ your,
'rs x x x x x
masc.; * your, fem.; ^nm\ .> their, masc.;
^ 7 \ X ^ X ^ X
their, fem.
Distributive pronouns are expressed by ,
and the preposition ^; sometimes the substantive
is taken away and the distributive pronoun is in¬
dicated by only; thus, ^oouio ]) some of
them, or ^ootjlLo some of them. Also . « i\o or
^ -r
whosoever, or sn t ^nXn whatsoever. The latter
pronoun is composed of ^ all, and ^oj^o something,
7 ) 7 \
or any thing.
Other pronouns are formed by adding the affixes
to the nouns ] I ^.1 soul or person, and IloqjLo
substance or person; as, y • A save thyself;
c n • %}o and he went, hanged himself;
7 * 7 \
mvn ni on in himself See also John vi. 53.
7S
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
61
29. Nouns with Affixes.
We come now to nouns with affixes. The vowel
changes of nouns receiving the affixes in Hebrew are
many and complicated; hut in Syriac are few and
simple. The following is an example of a masculine
noun, which is first put in the definite state and
then takes the affixes in the place of the termina¬
tion 1°.
Singular.
Def. State.
1st. pers. sing.
com.
2nd.
masc.
2nd.
fem.
3rd.
masc.
3rd.
fem.
1st. pers. plu.
com.
2nd.
masc.
2nd.
fem.
3rd.
masc.
3rd.
fem.
]^o
king
« i
my Icing
thy
thy
TS
his
<jiz££d
her ...
our ...
your ...
your . . .
^nrnoVVn
their ...
their ...
62
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
Plural.
1st. pers. sing.
com.
my kings
2nd .
masc.
. ■ •
thy . . •
2nd.
fem.
7.7
..» n » n._^o
thy
3rd.
masc.
7.7
w»CJIO
his
3rd.
fem.
her . . .
1st. pers. pin.
com.
our . . .
2nd.
masc.
•X 7 . 7
your ...
2nd .
fem.
7 . 7
‘7\
your ...
3rd .
masc.
•X 7 . 7
v ocn »
their ...
3rd .
fem.
v .m .
'rs
their • • •
The word _
* n\Vn
is pronounced Malh , the
w being otiose.
2. Nouns in the singular number the definite
state of which terminates in , form the affix of the
first person singular in . . . . and the second and third
X
persons plural in . nn » , v * n >, ^oot_» , ; thus,
I "T\ X X I
UX| boy, . . my boy, ,o ^ ..I 4 your boy, ^ocn^li
X ^ X X
their boy. ] Lord , which takes the affixes from
is an exception to this rule.
3. Such nouns as terminate in ^ and the letter
immediately before Yud having a vowel, when they
take the affixes the )° is removed, another is added,
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
63
in the plural, and the first Yud changes its vowel to
Pethocho; as, ] > i o an architect , pin. ] >,,1.*^,
•• 7 o
Ui > 1 .
/
4. Those nouns having the abs. state, as
‘Ts
and the definite, as |iori, retain the ^ with the
affixes of the first person sing, and second and third
persons plu.; as, my priest. Again, those in
'Ts
the ahs. state having the vowel v on the last syl¬
lable, and any other vowel on the preceding syllable,
the v is preserved with the affixes of the above-
mentioned persons ; as, abs. o^ijio altar ,
my altar.
5. There are some nouns, namely, monosyllables,
which have the vowel ^ in the abs. state, and
which lose it in the definite. Such nouns preserve
the ^ with the affixes of the above-mentioned per¬
sons; as, Lo) def. }Ld> blood , ^Ld? my blood.
6 . Some nouns in the plural number receive the
affixes both in the def. and const, states. They are
those which terminate in the absolute state in
p 7 • • V
the definite in and the constructive in „
7 • 7
Note, . , has two significations: 1st. my kings;
P 7 7 7
2nd. kings of; as, pj] . »nSvn kings of the earth.
v y p 7
The nouns jlNknVn speech , and ]1 \ hvp shade ,
which have the tinea occultans under the first Lomad,
when they take the affixes, the tinea occultans is re-
64
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
moved, and the Lomad receives v; as,
&c.
UjiD Lord , is not found with any pronominal
affix. The reason is, that under such circumstance,
the noun is used in its place; thus, Id my
Lord , thy Lord , cn£o his Lord , &c.
Three nouns, namely, father , ur brother,
father-in-law , take the affixes in an irregular manner.
2nd.
3rd.
3rd.
2nd.
3rd.
com.
y
* v
my father
masc.
*. 7
thy .
fem.
-a-socd")
* 7
thy .
masc.
vjOIQjd)
• X 7
his .
fem.
cna^l
X 7
her .
com.
^1
•X *X 7
.cincLff)
our .
masc.
your .
•x ?
fem.
. nn '-'d
your .
•X ‘X 7
masc.
•X 7
their .
fem.
their .
The other two nouns take the affixes in the same way,
except that ]£q*j makes . my father-in-law. See obs.
4, p. 45.
30. In feminine nouns the same affixes are used
for both numbers; namely, those which are annexed
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
65
to the singular number of masculine nouns. They are
put to the end of feminine nouns in the constructive
state in the first person singular, and in the second
and third persons plural, and at the end of their
definite state in the other parts, the termination ]
having been taken away. The reason of this differ¬
ence is, that in the pronominal affixes mentioned,
if they were placed to the definite state of the noun,
there would be a concourse of several consonants
without a vowel.
The following is an example of feminine nouns
with affixes.
1 p 7
abs. tOr-» family ,
A 7 7
const.
def.
1st. pers. sing.
com.
. 7 7
my family
2nd..
masc.
A 7
% .
2nd.
fem.
*7)
% .
3rd.
masc.
oi
his .
3rd.
fem.
aiAoj.^
her .
1st. pers. phi.
com.
7 a 7
our .
2nd.
masc.
•X 7 V
% CL
your .
2nd.
fem.
A 7 7
your .
3rd.
masc.
X 7 7
^OOIlVD;-*
their .
3rd.
fem.
'Ts
their ......
5
66
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
Plural.
1st. pers. sing.
com.
* p 7
my families
2nd.
masc.
V D V
thy .
2nd.
fern.
'A
% .
3rd.
masc.
cnA^^j*
is
/m .
3rd.
fern.
P P 7
OlA.O;_»
/*<?r .
1st. pers. pin.
com.
7. P 7
\A^r-»
.
2nd.
masc.
X . P 7
your .
2nd.
fem.
P 7
r -L.OA^^»
'A
your .
3rd.
masc.
•X P 7
^ocnA^j-*
their .
3rd.
fem.
'A
their .
p 7
with the affix _ transfers the v from the
first to the following letter; thus, _ Z-. a my daughter ;
hut it remains in the others; as, thy daughter,
xCloL-Jz your daughter .
31. Numerals and Particles with Affixes.
Numerals also receive the affixes of masculine nouns
in the plural number; thus, these two , masc.,
or_»Z 'ill these two, fern., .octl/aHZ these three , masc.,
^ocrLAZ^jf these four, ^oc these five, ^ooi222l»
these six, « these seven, ^ocru^iA dZ these eight,
pauA LmL these nine , .7 ten.
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES.
67
When the singular affixes are annexed, they have
the power of possessive pronouns, and possess there¬
fore another signification. For example, oiZj-Oll his
is
ten, tliy ten, their ten; and we find
very frequently in the New Testament m/ ; rnv ;Z his
'Ts IS
twelve, speaking of the twelve disciples of Christ.
A great number of particles take the affixes; as,
in, . . o in me, in thee; \ to, to you;
from, m iSo from him, ivn from us; jXccio after,
1\ Is is Is
after them, &c. Some particles take the
is
affixes of masc. nouns p]u.; as, before,
before me, ...vn 'n before thee; so likewise ow or
upon, v£lLkj jfor, instead of, and others.
VERBS.
32. In Syriac, as in Hebrew, the root of the verb
is the 3rd. pers. sing. numb, masculine gender of the
first conjugation. Most of the roots are triliteral, a few
are quadriliteral. The triliteral roots have a vowel
under the second letter, and make only one syllable.
The different forms of the verb, which express various
modifications of the original sense, are usually called
conjugations. They amount to eight, of which four
have an active, and four a passive, and sometimes a
reciprocal signification. They derive their names from
the verb VsJLss, and are contained in the following table,
from which the characteristic of each conjugation may
be observed.
Act.
Pass.
1
Peal
2 Ethpeel
i\ n\
3
Pael
'T\
4 Ethpaal
ALLZl
5
Aphel
-n
6 Ethtaphal
AlaZZ]
-7N
7
Shaphel
w:
'ts
8 Eshtaphal
"7N
The Peal
conjugation
is the same
as the Kal
the Hebrews; that is, it expresses the verb in its sim¬
plest form and meaning.
VERBS.
69
Ethpeel is the passive of the preceding conjugation,
and like the other passive conjugations has the syllable
L) prefixed*.
Pael is the Piel of the Hebrews ; when the signi¬
fication of the Peal conjugation is intransitive, the Pael
makes it transitive; as, he was just , Pael he
justifiedi sometimes it expresses the Peal sense with
greater energy; as, he sought , Pa. he sought dili -
gentlij . This conjugation has a causative sense in some
A
verbs; as, he bought , ^\ he caused to buy , i. e.
he sold. To the Pael is sometimes assigned the sense
of commanding , permitting and declaring what is ex¬
pressed by the Peal, and sometimes these two conju¬
gations have the same signification.
Ethpaal is the passive of the preceding conjugation.
As the Pael, in many instances, signifies to make or
cause to do whatever is indicated by the Peal, the
Ethpaal will necessarily signify to be made to do that
which is denoted by the Peal; and hence it is that
the Peal and Ethpaal conjugations in some verbs pos¬
sess the same meaning; as, he thought , .rvl ^ 7]
he was made to think , i. e. he thought.
* Professor Lee in his Heb. Gram, supposes Z*j to be a frag-
0
ment of the verb U'l he came; that it was originally written in
full; but in process of time it was pronounced and afterwards
written with the verb, the sense of which it qualified. See in his
Chap, on Heemanti nouns , his account of the force of this and
other particles which are prefixed to primitive words.
70
VERBS.
Aphel corresponds to the Hiphil of the Hebrews.
In sense it is usually causative of Peal; as, ^5 he
remembered , Aph. -i ^] 7 he caused to be remembered ,
he commemorated . It is also found to possess the sig¬
nification of desiring , 'permitting , declaring , exhibiting ,
&c. whatever is indicated by the Peal; as, he
permitted or granted power , ^n \ | 7 he exhibited trou -
ble. In some instances it has an intransitive meaning;
as, 5ouj 7 it shone . The characteristic is ] 7 prefixed to
the root.
The preceding conjugations are of very frequent use,
and are acknowledged by all Grammarians. Those which
follow are of much rarer occurrence.
The Ethtaphal is the passive of the preceding con¬
jugation. It is formed from the Aphel by prefixing
the particle 2], and changing the Olaph, the charac-
7 \
teristic of the Aphel conjugation, into Thau. Examples
of this form are seldom found. See Mark xiii. 24,
(Philox. vers.) the sun shall be darkened.
'b
The Shaphel conjugation is generally considered to
have the same signification as the Aphel; it is formed
by prefixing J* to the root, and like the Pael and
Aphel takes * under the second radical instead of v.
By many persons this conjugation has been referred
to quadriliteral verbs; but it is found so frequently—
much more so than the Ethtaphal—that Michaelis and
others have made it a separate conjugation of triliterals.
VERBS.
71
Examples are, • he made or caused to serve ,
*
he inflamed, Z he made perfect.
*T\
Eshtaphal is the passive of the preceding conjuga¬
tion, and is formed from it by prefixing Zj, transposing
'TS
the Z with the and changing * under the second
radical into v.
The Eshtaphal conjugation agrees in form with the tenth
conjugation of Arabic verbs.
If the first radical of a verb be ], *co, y w_», it is
transposed with Z of the particle Z] in the Ethpeel and
ns
Ethpaal conjugations; as, .n he was left, instead
71 7 >
of ^cicl»Z] ; he was If ted up, instead of ^qZmbZ') .
'TS IS 'D
After 1 , the Z is changed into 5 , and after ^ into
as, — he was conquered, he was crucified.
X ns 'IS ^71
Verbs are either regular or irregular. The former
class includes all those verbs which preserve their radi¬
cals unchanged throughout all their inflexions, the latter
those which lose or undergo a change of one or more
radicals.
There are two tenses, the prmterite and future.
Their forms are and and these forms
IS
determine the past and future times more accurately
than they do in Hebrew. The present tense may he
expressed by the active participle with the aid of the
personal pronouns. By means also of the auxiliary verb
two other tenses are defined ; namely, the imperfect
and pluperfect, of which some account will he after¬
wards given.
72
VERBS.
Sciadrensis in his Gram.
as follows : ] ^Vn r .r>
• \
p. writes on the tenses
&o ? ]h£ 1 ^hi
]i n|n ^o|oj, tLai ALd|£. Tenses also
are three , which we number in the first mood; namely , the prce-
terite , the present and the future. By the present tense he
means the active participle with a personal pronoun, and there
is no doubt that this combination is so often used for the pur¬
pose of representing a verb in the present tense, not only in
the versions of the scriptures, but also in Syriac writings
of a later date, that a grammarian may with propriety, as
Sciadrensis has done, give to this construction the name of
a present tense, ioio? Uni. In this respect the Syriac
language is much more perfect than any of the others which
belong to the Shemetic class. In Arabic the tense which the
grammarians designate resembling , viz. the form
w* o’
t_
is very uncertain as to the time it is intended to mark.
Sometimes, when accompanied by certain particles, such as
(jw it expresses the future; at other times, when it
is preceded by U it has the force of the present; but in
numerous instances the context alone can determine the tense
which this form of the verb is designed to indicate. So like¬
wise in iEthiopic there is so much indefiniteness on this point,
that Ludolph, in his JEthiopic Grammar, calls ^7-f) Q tempus con-
tingens , which he translates facit or faciet , p. 43 ; and in p. 37
he instructs us in this tense as follows: “ Contingens tarn
Prsesens, quam Futurum Indicativi represent at.”
The different numbers, persons and genders are
formed by prefixes and affixes joined to the root of
the verb, as in the Hebrew.
VERBS.
73
The imperative form is used in an affirmative
sense. A negation or prohibition is expressed by the
future tense and the particle $ not, placed before it.
The infinitive is in its nature an abstract noun,
and as such receives the pronominal affixes. It has
an active, neuter, or passive sense; and when added
to the verb will give intensity to the signification.
33. Before we proceed to give the tables of the
different classes of verbs, it is desirable to present the
student with the tenses, &c. of the substantive verb
]ooi he was, and of A_»] is, which are peculiar in
x
their forms, and because the former is much used in
the general conjugations.
Prceterite Tense.
Person.
Sing. Number.
Gender,
1
A_,ocn
X
I was
com.
2
Zuocn
tliou wast
masc.
2
_»A_»ooi
thou wast
fem.
3
]<001
he was
masc.
3
Zocn
she was
fem.
Plural Number.
1
y
^__»ooi
we were
com.
2
^C^LiOOl
you were
masc.
2
^Zuooi
you were
fem.
3
7
0001
they were
masc.
3
• • 7
»001
they were
fem.
74
VERBS.
Future.
Person.
1
Singular.
^OOl] I shall or
ns ns
will be
Gender.
com.
2
looiZ
ns ns
thou shalt
or wilt be
masc.
o
k-jOoiZ
X 7)
thou shalt
or wilt be
fem.
3
]oau
ns ns
he shall or will be
masc.
3
]ocnZ
ns ns
she shall or will be
fem.
1
"joCTU
ns ns
Plural.
we shall or will be
com.
2
v 00C7lZ
^ ns
ye shall or will be
masc.
2
0 •• .
^—»ooiZ
ns
ye shall or will be
fem.
3
^ooou
■7>
they shall
or will be
masc.
3
P ••
^OOU
ns
they shall
or will be
fem.
Infinitive.
loaiioX
ns
to be.
Imperative.
2 »._»0C71
X
Singular.
or A_»001 be thou
X
masc.
2
X
be thou
fem.
2
v o2uOC7I
Plural.
be ye
masc.
2
^A^ocn
7s
be ye
fem.
VERBS.
75
Present Tense.
Person.
Singular.
Gender.
1
/ am
com.
2
•X 7
ooi Aj*|
art
masc.
2
i 7
v^cn
thou art
fem.
3
OOI OOI
he is
masc.
3
I p
«_iGl w_ i01
she is
fem.
Plural.
1
7 7
^ .1 K» ^ l.Ki
we are
com.
2
•X -X 7
<ojl voAj!
* 7 *
ye are
masc.
2
_.Aj|
i\ t\ n\ “
ye are
fem.
3
•X P P
^QJOI ^.jOO 1
'TS
they are
masc.
3
0 •• P P
they are
fem.
Participle.
Singular.
]ocji
- 7 >
being or is
masc.
a P o
L*ooi
being or is
fem.
Plural.
^OCTI
being or are
masc.
• • p p
^OOI
being or are
fem.
76
VERBS.
The personal pronouns are frequently used in the
place of the substantive verb after a participle, by
which means the present tense of verbs may be ex¬
pressed, as will he afterwards seen. We have also
the personal pronoun in such an instance; as, ooi
he is good. In these cases, and are cm-
T\ 'H
ployed in preference to ^qjoi and ^joi.
34. We come next to A_.*j is , which is the same as
x
the Hebrew It takes the affixes in the following
manner.
Person.
Plural.
Singular.
Gender.
1
X
ice are
_Ll
X
I am
•
com.
2
ye are
^A-»]
i
thou art
masc.
2
'ts I
ye are
X
thou art
fem.
3
X
they are
7
X
he is
masc.
3
^__»CTL_» A_»^
they are
ot_»A_.1
stie is
fem.
i -n i
If to A_i*| with its affixes be joined the verb ]oai,
i
the imperfect tense will be formed; thus, A^ocn
x
thou ivcist, ]ocn ^cn_» 7 A_*"| he was.
x
The verb A_»l signifies to have , when it is followed
x
by Lomad with the pronominal affixes; as, - . \ Zl*T
X X
there is for me, i.e. I have .
VERBS.
77
Plural.
Singular.
Gender.
4 L.)
X
we have
ZL.1
I X
I have
com.
A-.]
X
ye have
A LA
I
thou hast
masc.
TS X
ye have
> > A_>]
*TN I
thou hast
fern.
^CKJL^ A_»]
X
they have
cri^ A.,]
^ i
he has
masc.
A_»]
X
they have
oil A1
I
she has
fern.
The negative form is A»\ 3 a contraction of ]]
and A_>1 ; when it is joined with the pronominal affixes
X
we obtain the following, . »\ AjJL there is not for
X
me , i. e. I have not , hast not , and so
on for the others. Or by annexing the affixes to the
verb we have, . > V I am not , .. . 7 A . ^ thou art not ,
tzoZ, &c.
35. We will now give a paradigm of ^uo in all
its conjugations, &c. as an example of the inflexion
of regular verbs in general.
78
CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS.
Peal.
Ethpeel.
Pael.
Ethpaal.
PrEet. 3. masc.
M*zr
MA
MAzr
3. fem.
Al&A
Al^AZf
Al&A
AlfeAZf
2. masc.
AXioZf
AA|A
AAlAZf
2. fem.
^AA£j=Zf
^AZ4A
-AA&AZf
1. com.
.'ft 7\
AX-&_q
• ^ 7
AX^o
A^izr
Plur. 3. masc.
oX^jq
al&oZf
ol4o
aA&AZf
3. fem.
» \|lQ
^XioZf
. » X |y.n
^A|AZT
2. masc.
^oAX^_q
v 5^zr
<oAA|A
*ozz4Azr
2. fem.
^Aiiozr
^Al|A
^zzoAzr
1. com.
^zr
« 7> 7
^A4°
^zr
Infinitive.
nV^nAvT
nVftnvn
az4A aA
Imper. masc.
MAzi
Mi
mazi
— n
fem
^ » \o n
. » \ An71
. » \ An
. .\A.n71
Plur. masc.
aXa^o
aA&AZl
aX&A
aA^Azf
fem.
» \n A n
„\£.o
. vazi
TN ~ -7N
1 o
^ n
Fut. 3. masc.
MAj
MAzi
3. fem.
Ho It
MAz
MAzr
2. masc.
Holt
MAz
MA zr
2. fem.
. \ A n7
:\£n/r
:\ao;
^:\kn?r
1. com.
Holf
U
MAf
MAzf
Plur. 3. masc.
^oX^qj
^oX^-dAj
^qV^Aj
^qX^-oAj
3. fem.
. t>
^4Aa3
^A&oj
^AAaJ
2. masc.
,aHAZ
<0±&1X
^A;
^AZZ”
2. fem.
A&Az
^4ozr
^s&Az
^MLir
1. com.
Holt
MAa3
Part. act.
MA
^XXoAId
^,oAo
MAasd
pass.
X
MAio
example he slew .
79
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Shaphel.
Eshtaphal.
U°t
amm
AM
amm
^4of
aMM’
aim
aimm
amt
Alio22T
AZAcA
aml.]-
^AA&of
-AlioZZf
^.aAM*
AA&oT
AlioZZf
aAM
Al&Mf
<A&4
cAMZf
cAM
Mr
...\lnf
. .\RA;;f
. .\j\nl
- .V^nA.f
<oAA&4
,oAlMZf
,oAAM»
M4Mf
t> # ^ «v
^.AlA-o]
MMtf
^ZAM
MU
am 7
MMf
. •» 7
M-&^-»
MMr
Q±bnlt&
•X • ? 7
o m4-q-«m
•X , P 7 -ft
n\£.nA.m^n
AMU
am
*-*A&Af
.MM
a\4of
oAMZl
o.\4 Q -»
qX&oA^')
r^A&of
^ -7>
MMZ]
•7> -n
^. \&n »
7> 7N
7> "" 7>
A&u
AMa3
AM 1
^LJ
AM
amt
AMz
AMM
AM
amt
AMZ
M'
k l\Kn; 7
» \ Aol^
:\hnA.r
AM
am#
AM-
M’
•X . . 7 . *
^o\^oZ.Aj
•X . . 7
^aM^Q-ft-J
MM
MMAj
M 40 M
MM
p4nl£
MMM
MM
MM”
MMz
MMM
AM
AMa3
AMM
AM>
AMAia
V)
\J^oLmlD
a|M
^J!o.«Ld
80
REGULAR VERBS.
36. Observations on Regular Verbs.
The Prceterite.
The first letter of the root is generally without
a vowel, the second has for the most part v, but
sometimes it has * 9 especially in intransitive verbs
and verbs denoting the affections, qualities, or sensa¬
tions of the mind ; as, he ceased , Zato he
blushed , he cleaved , he slept, ^_i5 he
t> n, -n
trembled , • he laid down , o - he inhabited.
^ "7N
Also verbs whose middle radical is Olaph; as,
he enquired , he was hoary. Some verbs there
are which admit both ? and *; as, and .mv\ /ze
eaten; but in many of these instances a difference
of signification is denoted; thus, he absolved , and
So'v - he was absolved. Similarly . 'and
Those also whose first radical is Yud have frequently
* under the second; as, he set.
The Yud of the feminine gender, third person,
plural number is sometimes omitted and the verb is
written as they slew , fern. The same occasionally
happens to Vau of the masculine gender. The reason
is that these letters are never pronounced.
Nun paragogic is added in some instances both
to the masc. and fern, genders of the third person,
plural number, but more frequently to the latter;
as, v n\^ . third pers. plu. masc. and fern.
REGULAR VERBS.
81
The force of this particle is supposed to he that
of giving energy or certainty to the expressions in
which it is found to occur.
The Ethpeel of the 3rd. pers. sing. fern, in some
examples terminates in Yud; as, oiAdoj . » his
place was not hiown. Bar. Heb. Chron. 86 . 5. See
also 135. 5; 482. 8 .
o and ^ at the end of the 3rd. pers. plu^ masc. and
fern, are otiose , and on that account are occasionally cast
away.
Some verbs are found to have Olaph prosthetic ;
as, he found .
The numbers and persons of this tense are formed
by affixing a particle of one of the personal pronouns
•x y ^7 7
to the radical letters; thus, ^oAZJ^o for ^oAjj ^ 40 .
The Future.
This Tense seems to be formed in the active con¬
jugations by prefixing certain abbreviated forms of
the personal pronouns to the imperative mood ; thus,
^q4o] for ^a4o and ]j"); ^a4oZ for ^a4o and
Ajf.
In the passive conjugations the same forms are
used instead of } of the particle Zj.
Verbs having * under the middle radical of the
prseterite, in the future take v ; as, ,_4o]; those also
6
82
REGULAR VERBS.
whose third radical is a guttural or Rish take
A few verbs submit to no rule as to the vowels
which they receive; thus, I will receive, which
'Ts 'h
has the same vowels as the Heb.
• . V
The second and third persons singular feminine
sometimes admit Yud otiose or paragogic at the end;
thus, \ /y oZ and Z.
X ^ ^
The prseformative letters are not four, as in Hebrew,
namely, but only three, namely, ^Z). The third
person sing, and plu. of both genders take j instead of
_» as in Hebrew, probably from jjoi.
It is certainly somewhat remarkable that the prefix
for the 3rd. pers. of the fut. should be Nun, when in Heb.
and also in Chald. Arab, and ACthiop. it is Yud. The
deviation of the Syriac in this particular from the rest of the
Shemetic languages has been a puzzle to many, and has given
rise to various conjectural explanations. The one however
in which Grammarians have seemed most inclined to repose,
is this, viz. that the Nun was written for Yud by mistake.
This opinion is expressed as follows by Hoffman, but in
which this distinguished linguist does not at all concur.
“ Nun praeform. 3 personae multis suspectum fuit, quia in
cognatis dialectis Yud inveniebatur, neque dubitarunt littera-
rum Yud et Nun, quae sane sunt figura simillimae, in auxi-
lium vocare permutationem facillimam.” Now this mode of
accounting for Nun instead of Yud appears to me in the
highest degree improbable; indeed almost absurd, when we
consider that the language was written and spoken at the
same time, and that Nun is so unlike Yud in pronunciation
REGULAR VERBS.
83
that it is next to impossible that one letter should be mis¬
taken for the other. It is better therefore that we should
rest satisfied with the fact, that the fut. form of the 3rd.
pers. is and not V\ nAn . . than to attempt to explain
what, for want of data, is obviously inexplicable.
is the third pers. sing. masc. and the first
T\
pers. plii. masc.; hut the context will determine the
person which is to be taken.
The verb / he obeyed , receives ^ for * through
i
the whole of the Ethpeel conjugation, except the infin.,
which is regular; thus, praet. .nr>. ^ imper. ora . H } }
X 'T) I >
part. ,£Q_»_2 l£A1o.
X TS
Infinitive.
The Infinitive of all the conjugations has Mem
praeformative. The Peal is masculine. The others
have the termination o, and are feminine.
Imperative.
The observation on the vowel placed over the second
radical of the future holds good in the imperative; as,
o, ^v make ye , ooVn ? sleep ye. In the Ethpeel and
Ethpaal conjugations the middle radical has no vowel,
and under it is placed the linea occultans. This pecu¬
liarity has probably arisen from the general practice of
people to utter a command in a hasty and an abrupt
manner.
Nun paragogic is sometimes found with the forms
of the imper. in the Peal, Pael and Aphel conjuga¬
tions; as, v ddcLdo for cAd^o.
6—2
84
REGULAR VERBS.
Participles.
The Participle active Peal is always written as
without the Vau, which is inserted in the He-
ns
brew participial noun Kal. This circumstance arises
from Vau not being used with the vowel hut
with \ On the contrary the passive participle has
with the vowel 1 ; as, The participles of
x
all the other conjugations are derived from the prae-
terite by prefixing Mem. This letter is very probably
a particle of the pronoun ^o, ,_1 d, or jlo; so that
^ An^n is lie who slayeth , i. e. one slaying . In the
ns
passive and Aphel conjugations the Olaph is omitted
and its vowel taken by the Mem.
The part. sometimes takes the vowel v on
X
7
the first rad., especially on intrans. verbs; as, » m . W
x x
astonished , Luke i. 21.
From the last remark but one must be exempted
some verbs of the Aphel conjugation, which retain the
Olaph when another letter is prefixed; as, »
ns
permitting to live. This is also the case in the fu¬
ture.
The Olaph of the Aphel conjugation is changed
y y y y
in the Ethtaphal into Z; as, ^j^qZASo for ^^.qIASd.
ns ns
This is likewise true in the whole conjugation.
37. The gutturals produce a few anomalies, and only a
few; for the Syrians have not so great a variety of vowel
changes as the Hebrews. Verbs, the third radical of
REGULAR VERBS.
85
which is oi, oj, vx or 5, have in the future and imperative
Peal for the most part the vowel v under the middle
radical. In the other conjugations and the active parti¬
ciple Peal, they have v in the place of *; as,
y y y y y y
worshipping , oojij mlD glorying, he mocked, ^ 53 ] he
commemorated.
The verbs he consoled, 1&4’ he defiled, *|] ^ he pol¬
luted, in the Pael and Ethpaal conjugations, have the same
changes of the vowels as the gutturals which are mentioned
in the preceding paragraph.
38. The Present Tense is formed by the participles
(form and the personal pronouns placed after
them; thus,
Singular.
'T,
001
I am slaying
thou art slaying
thou art slaying
lie is slaying
she is slaying.
Plural.
41 v 1^40
^ ™ T
we are slaying I
l masc.
ye are slaying I
&c.
7 v » p
we are slaying
ye are slaying
86
REGULAR VERBS.
The third pers. plu. is expressed simply by the
act. part, in the plural number.
These auxiliary pronouns are sometimes contracted
and affixed to the verb; as, AlLguo, thou art
slaying , second pers. sing. masc. and fern.
The substantive verb added to the participial
form ^40 will sometimes express the imperfect tense;
7 >
as, looi he was slaying. But if this verb be
added to the praeterite it will sometimes make the
pluperfect tense; as, loan he had slain.
The pluperfect tense will not always be determined
in this manner; for it sometimes happens that the
auxiliary verb is thus found with the praeterite, when
the context will not permit it to signify the pluper¬
fect tense. In such case the praeterite or imperfect
tense will be expressed.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
39- Large classes of verbs deviate from the fore¬
going paradigm of and present many irregularities
in the process of conjugation. They are produced by
nearly the same causes as in Hebrew, namely, by
gutturals, which have been already noticed; by the
letters } o ; by the first radical being Nun; or by
87
tr tt
VERBS OR . .
the second and third radicals being the same. Indeed
the same classes of irregular verbs exist in the Hebrew,
Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic and the whole of that family
of languages.
We have seen that the verb is employed to
designate the conjugations. The classes of irregular verbs
also are usually denoted, for the sake of brevity, by one
of the letters in ; thus, ja, . . cy stand for
tr n
verbs the first radical of which is ] w or j; K ai,
those the middle radical of which is | o or
u , or the second and third radicals the same; and finally
" tr
B, -X, those the last radical of which is *) or u ,
40. Verbs or
1. In accounting for the anomalies which exist
in this class, it is to be observed that Olaph or
Yud beginning a word must have a vowel; as,
he was anxious , ^ he begot , and not
See § 5.
2. In the middle of a word Olaph or Yud and
the preceding letter cannot be both without vowels.
This is the consequence of what is stated in (1);
for in those forms where two consonants without
vowels come together the Olaph or Yud would begin
a syllable, and would consequently require a vowel as
much as at the beginning of a word.
3. This vowel of the Olaph or Yud is generally
remitted to the preceding letter; but when an ad-
88 VERBS OR
dition is made to the end of the word, to avoid
the concourse of several letters without vowels, the
Olaph or Yud retains its vowel; thus, Z^Zj he was
7\ 1 ns
begotten, n\n ]7] they were corroded , 7,V1/1 / was
n\ ns ns ns ns
begotten .
4. In the Aphel, Shaphel, and their passive con¬
jugations, the Olaph or Yud is changed into Vau,
which coalesces with the preceding y and makes the
diphthong an; as,
ns ns
5. Olaph and Yud are dropped in the future
first person singular; as, I shall eat , for
y
/ shall beget .
X
6. Verbs are regular in the Pael and Ethpaal
conjugations, which are therefore exceptions to (5).
7. In the Peal conjugation the vowel of the
Olaph is ^ in the prset. In the pass, participle it is
y . In the imper. in those cases where the second
vowel is Vtlie first is y ; as, ^o_of eat thou , masc.;
but if the second vowel be Y, the first is ^; as,
Ao) say thou , masc. A similar rule is observed in the
ns
future tense, namely, when the second vowel is * the
first is % and when the second is y the first is x .
8. The Olaph in the Ethpeel and Ethpaal con¬
jugations is sometimes changed into Z; as, ,_k*ZZ 1 from
VERBS OR . . g>v
89
,-L] lie took , ^JZ2] he lamented. Indeed Olaph pre-
ceded by Thau is frequently changed into Thau for
the sake of euphony.
9. Olaph or Yud in the middle of a word rests
in general in * or x . The latter is sometimes changed
into the former.
The verb Vi he departed , makes its imperative mood
of the Peal conjugation thus,
,_Ai all i
n\ ns ns as ns
The ^ of 'Sll has the tinea occultans as often as it
ns
ought to have a vowel from the analogy of the regular
verb, and Zain by the same rule is without one. In such
cases the vowel of Lomad is remitted to Zain; as, Alii
“ ns
she departed.
In the passive part. Peal the radical ^ in some verbs
y
receives the vowel v instead of 1 ; as, .<* . \ . taught , Rom.
x
ii. 18.
y
Yud in the verb *o<n_» has no need of the vowel 1 ;
because the second radical is not pronounced, and therefore its
vowel is remitted to the first. In the imper. we have
The Yud remains in the Aphel conjugation in the verbs
he ejaculated, .n y he sucked.
90
VERBS g*> .
^>1 he was faithful , in the Aphel conjugation takes
'TS
cji as the characteristic, and *j is changed into ; thus,
V) . m he believed; so Heb. Arab. { j^.
Some verbs beginning with Yud reject this radical in
y y
the inf. and fut. Peal; as, he knew , inf. ; ^oA_» he
m •
I 'TS "TS 1
y
set , fut. jdAj.
41.
Verbs
The anomalies belonging to this class of verbs
are only few; the principal one is the rejection of
Nun in certain situations, and the rule is this: when¬
ever Nun is at the end of a syllable and without a
vowel, according to the analogy of the regular verb,
it is rejected. We have therefore fut. Peal *qq_£u
ns
Ne-puk , for *ocl£llj Nen-puk , inf. .n for ^oAjlIo.
In the imper. Peal the Nun is thrown away at
the beginning of the word; as, for *oqAj. The
reason of this elision is perhaps the difficulty of pro¬
nouncing it with rapidity in such a situation, and it
has therefore been neglected in writing.
The Ethpeel, Pael and Ethpaal conjugations of
these verbs are quite regular in all their forms.
Verbs of this class are not found in the Shaphel
and its passive conjugation.
7
conjugation of verbs r _£^. ex. . n m he ivent forth , 91
Peal.
Afel.
Ethtafal.
Pnet. Sing. 3. masc.
^,‘f
•cJaZZl
3. fem.
A 7 *
An^ i
Anaf
hncfl 7]
1
2. masc.
AnAj
An^f
Ani/ZZl
2. fem.
^AoAj
-Aoaf
^AnaZZI
1. com.
-n .7
O.Q.^1
An A7 7]
Plur. 3. masc.
oqAj
onaZZ]
3. fem.
.-■j-qAi
■ ■
n
. . nn//]
2. masc.
• X A 7
v oAn^u
^Aoaf
voAaaZZ]
2. fem.
'T* 7
A 14 I 7
r ^An^|
^An^ZZ]
1. com.
* i 7
^oiiZZl
n
Infinitive.
7 n
•X P 7
o o nCn
•X D 7. •?>
q-q^ZALo
Imper. Sing. masc.
^)0£)
- *i 7
*oa|
xQ AZZ]
fem.
vjJDQ£)
* i 7
^-qA7 7]
Plur. masc.
dOQ£)
71 1 7
ociaj
o-dAZZ]
fem.
V ->.00£1
-n -n ~ 7
>
v '
w^zzi
"" n
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
%£)Q_2lJ
-r, 7
J"L2U
*qA2.Aj
3. fem.
•X . 7>
ci-QQ£li
.. o^;; 7
77 ,
. » nn77
2. masc.
•X «T>
kOO£)L
^i)Z 7
.aaZf
2. fem.
» nc?)f
■ A ^77'
1. com.
xOO£>)
v v
.clsI
v ^zzi
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fem.
•X ^
<Q_Q_£U
7, 7
<00^1
P 7
^-CL^U
^oq^ZAj
n n 7 7 Aj
2. masc.
2. fem.
1. com.
p .?>
iDd£U
^z 7
^ 7
V. .■»'
^CLQ£)ZA
V -X 7. O
a^AA
7 7, »
.nn/A j
Part. act.
n P
xO-gU
^ 7
%n ^Vo
^ZAi
pass.
A.1
7 7
vn^ik)
92
CONJUGATION OF VERBS |^ 4
Peal.
Ethpeel.
Pael.
Ethpaal.
Prat. Sing. 3. masc.
<> 'TX
'MZI
^of
^ollf
3. fem.
Ai=r
Aioizr
Alof
Aiofzr
2. masc.
Alif
Aloft*
Alof
Aloft*
2. fem.
-Aloft’
-Alof
-Aloft*
1. com.
Aiof
Aloft"
Alof
Aloft*
Plur. 3. masc.
alof
aloft*
alof
aloft*
3. fem.
— lof
^ 'TN ^
-NoUl
-lof
-lollf
2. masc.
,oAloft*
,oAlof
^Aloft*
2. fem.
^Aloft*
^f
^Aioin*
1. com.
^Uf
^sr
^ft"
Infinitive.
•X • Pm.'*'*
a-io \ A k>
alili
olilfci
Imper. Sing. masc.
V Z 1
^ft
fem.
-loof
-Noft
-lof
^rzi
Plur. masc.
aloof
aloft
alof
aloft
fem.
7\
^in
'i> -n
^i=ft
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
'iaotf
^1A3
^olL*
3. fem.
— laotf:
-T» -7\ 'VS
-lo]ZZ
-loir
-lift"
2. masc.
^izz
^ft"
2. fem.
x 7 ^
^IZZ
r^oU’
ft^oft"
1. com.
^U1
Plur. 3. masc.
,alolA]
^lol2j
3. fem.
gLolAj
^ft"
2. masc.
^oir
•X _ 7 -*
vol^lZl
^>U'
,aloft*
2. fem.
r^oir
p 7 -t\
r±>)LL
gift"
1. com.
'iaotf
^olAS
^13
Part. act.
'h
^]Ak)
'Mi
pass.
I
'fcoli
EXAMPLE, he eat. 93
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Shaphel.
Eshtaphal.
WZZf
•
wm*
ASsoT
ZZ^aoZZf
Alsai
ZdaoL.f
Aliof
Aiioizr
ZZ^ai
Al^f
^ZZ^of
^A-ZiolZf
*-iAXDQ_»
^Alio’ZUf
ZZ^of
A!=0 7 zzr
ZZZaai
ASsoM*
aliof
oVioZZf
olioM"
^A£of
-XsxiZT
^a£o;
^Licz^r
^oAXioZZf
.cA^clI
,oZZ^U
^Aliol 7
^ziio 7 zzf
^Ali>oL.f
7 i\o 0 f
7 . -* 7
i \nn a
k i 7 \^nA .)'
•X. P 7
oA^ok)
<ZlZ,oZAk>
x. ° v
Q-±DQ-a±D
* • P 7 ■*
n Non A • Vo
w
^olL)
V}oL»]
. » Von*) 7
^.. ^.\n n / / I
. *
. » VonA ,*)
oZZof
aVnoZZ]
oZma.*
*7*
Q-VzDoZ_»*|
» Von*) 7
.\nn 7 ;;]
_.^\oo w
..» \nn?i »1
^ T\
*7S ^
*7\
'h " ^
^oi
^oZaJ
W^n I 1
^oZ 7
bio’ll
^aiZ
^ioL.Z'
W 7
wzr
^oiZ
^oL.r
^ZsoZ 7
^SdoLT
^jZZdq»z
v . WA.r
wzr
^oir
^oL»T
^Q.VnQJ
,iWzJ
\
I i
^oZaJ
v ^n.: i
^aoLxi
^aV^oZ 7
,alao 7 ZZ”
yoVna^Z
^laoL.Z”
^StjoZ 7
^oir
Z^aiZ
^oL.L'
WZa3
^dqSo
WZAio
VWlVn
WnnA ■» Vn
ViiasL
W^nlvn
94
//
CONJUGATION OF VERBS . .
Peal.
Ethpeel.
Praet. Sing. 3. masc.
zz:
'h I 7\
XL)
3. fem.
lx
iXiT
2. masc.
IX
*T\ X ‘1\
LXL)
•
2. fem.
~LX
•
H X 'TS
~LXD
1. com.
LX
•
lXlT
Plur. 3. masc.
0^
'TS X 'TS
oXL)
3. fem.
..
•
*I\ X IS
XL)
2. masc.
* TS I ^
v oZ^Zl
2. fem.
xx
^zzzLlf
1. com.
^X
Infinitive.
sx
•X P X
o r \^Zlo
•
Imper. Sing. masc.
X
•
I
r^l
'TS
fem.
<
•
X
XL)
Plur. masc.
•
oXL)
fem.
T\ X
^X)
T\ "7>
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
St
♦
X ^
•
3. fem.
** X
-Z^ZZ
•
2. masc.
sx
”7\ X 'h
^zz
•
2. fem.
SSX
T 7 *
^XLL
1. com.
ST
XL)
Plur. 3. masc.
Xt
(Xtt
3. fem.
(St
(XS
2. masc.
XX
(XX
2. fem.
(SX
(XX
1. com.
St
T\ x -n
•
Part. act.
X
•
r l^ASo
•
pass.
X
•
X
EXAMPLE, A- lie begot. 95
7> x
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Shaphel.
Eshtaphal.
M
SoUX
AcA
•
A°Af
is of
LSo’ux
»
ZA<A
•
ZAoAl’
•
zAof
zAoLir
ZA<A
zAoAf
^LSo\
^zAoizr
^zA<A
•
^zAoA'f
IS of
zAoZzi"
"N y
A,Jacl_»
*
ZAoAf
oAoT
oAoizr
oAcA
•
o'AoAr
•
-Aof
-Aoizr
^AcA
•
^AoL»f
v sz'Aoizr
^ZAcA
v AAoAr
AAAf
A^Ao'zzr
AzAoi
AzAoAr
AA°i
^Aoizr
y ^ 7
■-j r Aa.>
V •
AAoAr
x .p y
Q r AOlf)
SAo'ZAA
•
•x .<> y
o,~aq._®Ao
x . p y •*
o^oA-^lo
•
Aof
A°ai
AcA
•
A°Al
-AoT
'Ts
-AolZl
t-jf^ACL*
•
ZaoZl®^
^ |
O
o
oAoZZl
Oj^CL®
Oj^oAjsI
'T\
^AoZZl
T* *7>
A AcA
V •
'7s
r A.oA_»]
“ -n
ss
Ao 7 za3
•
AqAj
•
AoAA
^AoZ 7
•
^Ao 7 ^’
w.A<AZ
-AoAz*
•
AoZ 7
Aolz'
AAZ
AoAr
^A°-
^SoiT
,A<AZ
^AoLA
A°T
Ao 7 zzf
AAT
AoAf
^O^QJ
v oAo2A
AAoAj
£S°Lm2
v Ao 7 ZaJ
P. y
y-AOAj
v AoLA
^AoZ 7
v oAo 7 ZZ*
^cvXa-aZ
AAoA.r
v Aor
^Ao'zz”
v AcAZ
v AoAZ'
Aai
•
Ao’ZAj
AaAj
AoLA
•
•
Soltis
^Aa-Lk)
y v
J^soLstlo
AoA
•
.y y
r A.a-a-k)
9G
VERBS QA OR . . V .
The vowel of the second radical in the fut. and
impel*. Peal observes generally the same rule as regular
verbs ; thus, i lie cut, he breathed, . «..qj
he fixed, take the vowel x ; but he adhered,
"7\
5Aj it flowed down, have v. There are a few excep¬
tions; as, he descended, which takes x in the
•7>
fut. and imper.
The rule for the removal of Nun does not apply
to verbs of this class, when the second and third
radicals are the same; nor when the middle radical
is one of the quiescent letters; nor in some verbs whose
second radical is He.
.n\cn he ascended , is anomalous, and takes some of its
'TS
y V
forms from the obsolete verb ^ ; as, .n m imper.
y y
.n mVn inf. ^Q£d| fut.
Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation, is oc-
casionally retained with the prefixes; as, thou wilt
bring down, from
'Ti
n "
42. Verbs qa or . . v
Verbs having Vau and those having Yud for their
middle radical letter differ so little from each other in
their conjugations, that they may be both compre¬
hended in one class. These letters are sometimes placed
in such situations as to lose their consonantel power,
and defects in consequence arise in those forms of the
verb where that power is lost.
1. Vau deprived of a vowel for the most part
rests in the vowel x . In such a case whenever another
VERBS Q..1 OR . » V .
97
vowel is required by the analogy of the regular verb,
the Vau is usually changed into Yud; as, S o > n 77]
i 'is
for SoaoZZ], Aki^o for AicLO.
2. Vau for the most part takes the vowel * or
x . When therefore another vowel is required by the
analogy of the regular verb, the Vau is taken away
or changed into Olaph or Yud; as, Soo for 1>oq_q,
for Socld.
3. In the Aphel conjugation the Vau is changed
into Yud; the vowel % which belongs to Vau, is also
changed into x , and this vowel is remitted to the pre¬
ceding letter; as, ^a^o) v for ^ooof.
X 71
There are some verbs which preserve the o in the Pael
and Ethpaal conjugations; as, jo\ Tie disturbed , foil) Tie was
7» 'IS
disturbed.
In the part. Peal the Vau is changed into Olaph, and
is pronounced Yud. When the third radical is a guttural
or Rish, the vowel ^ is changed into v. See $ 37.
Throughout the Ethpeel conjugation Z of the syl¬
lable Z] is doubled, except in the 2nd. pers. fut. This
'IS
is the same as in Chaldee, except in the latter lan¬
guage the duplication is made by Dagesh forte.
The verbs of this class are not found in the Sha-
phel and Eshtaphal conjugations.
There are some verbs having the middle radical Vau,
which are not conjugated after the paradigm; namely,
7
98
VERBS Q_V, OR . » k .
(1) Those which have Olaph or Yud for the
third radical; as, ]o_» he was equal,
i
he adhered.
( 2 ) Such verbs as _^ojcd he desired , he
IS
acted unjustly.
In some verbs a difference of signification is marked
by the middle radical Vau being moveable or other¬
wise; as, 5 <Lk» it was white , 5aZi he saw.
Verbs having Yud for the middle radical letter,
preserve it in some of the forms of the Peal conjuga¬
tion ; for instance, A > in the praeterite.
Plural.
Singular.
oA..>-So
I
A_ulD
X
wiA.xAo
i
ZA-lAD
X
•X
^oZAjlId
^ X
ZA-i.So
X
.ZAjlAD
wiZA.a-V)
'IS X
y
X
V A-lAd
X
ZA.J.V)
^ X
In the fut. Peal the praeformative letters have no
vowel except that which belongs to the first person
singular.
From verbs of this class quadriliteral forms are fre¬
quently derived, and make two additional conjugations,
namely, Palpel and its passive Ethpalpal; as, he
made a commotion , from v>oj; lie exalted , from
y>ol. See quadriliteral verbs.
VERBS ]].
99
In he lived , whenever a praeformative is annexed,
the Yud is taken away and its vowel remitted to the pre¬
ceding consonant; as, inf. ]_kZsD for ]
43. Verbs
There are a few anomalies in these verbs, but they
are not so numerous nor of a kind to require a para¬
digm. Most of them may be accounted for on the
principle stated in § 40; namely, that Olaph remits its
vowel to the preceding letter, which was previously
without a vowel. Agreeably to this law we have
he was good, he was old, he enquired, imper.
Ai put on the shoe. So also in Ethpeel we have
'TS
Olaph is sometimes placed before the first radical;
we have indeed the following forms, «_»fc>Z1,
ML), ML).
'TS 1\ Ts **
In Aphel we have he did badly, he
put on the shoes, he did well.
In Pael and Ethpaal conjugations Olaph is changed
into Yud; as, > [ he prepared, ^l [)\ he was pre-
pared.
ft
44. Verbs ]].
This class comprehends the two classes of Hebrew
verbs terminating in N and n, and the three classes
of Arabic verbs ending in 1 j c*.
7 —2
100
CONJUGATION OF VERBS n V .
Peal.
Ethpeel.
Pael.
Prast. Sing. 3 . masc.
3. fem.
P
So o
Sn.nZ/f
n y
V> » n
y o
Akio
Aku^ZZf
* 7 7
Aln^o
2. masc.
Akio
A'.n.oVy
. -* y
ASo->-r)
2. fem.
^ZAo-i-n221
. y
wjAIq-s-O
1. com.
p
Akio
Av> . r>77f
. * y
A1q-i_o
Plur. 3. masc.
qIoo
nvn. A;;y
^ 7
o^n->.r)
3. fem.
..y».A;;y
n y
. » Sn > o
2. masc.
•x . »
•x *7
^nASn * n
2. fem.
r p
^AkiO
f
'TS H 7
^ALq^-d
1. com.
7 P
itnn
A;;f
y -n y
i Vn » n
V
Infinitive.
£ni,ZAk>
•X P 7
nVn > nVo
Imper. Sing. masc.
fem.
•X
^OQ_D
So » n77]
7
So „ n
•X
. . Son r>
x
.» So , r>7 7]
-TS
7
. * Vn » o
Plur. masc.
olocLo
X TS
oV) i oZZ]
'Ti
7
oVii.r)
fem.
IS
v » V> > .oZZI
TS X TS
y
V „1 Sqj.jD
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
Snoni
So „ n7 A i
n y
So. ni
3. fem.
. » Son o7
A;;*
H y ,
- »Vo»-n/
2. masc.
!>oclo2
x , ,-n
^cu_o77
-» 7 «
^0„> JDL
2. fem.
X I . .T>
^-j-kXi-QZZ
1 7 ?
v ,> V) >.oZ
1. com.
•X
isOQ-O]
^qSqo o i
Sn_..A77f
H 7 .11
.O'V?a-Q 1
Plur. 3. masc.
^QSfX* ,oZAj
3. fem.
Soon i
p X , _ *
So t ry A 1
p y
,_Sn . n i
2. masc.
•X ‘X •
yQlOCLOL
•X X * .n
^oin-ji oZZ
•x y ,
xQlCLi-QL
2. fem.
P -X -
^LdqldA
p i , ,ii
^Icu-oZZ
o 7 .
^£luOL
1. com.
^OOQl
^a»iZAj
n y
>CL»-QJ
Part. act.
Sola
'A
^aa.r^ZAAo
So_^oSn
pass.
Sa_»_Q
y y
Sq-x nSp
example, So n n arise thou .
101
Ethpaal.
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Palpel.
Ethpalpal.
y y
x .7
i-a^ZZ'l
71 7
1>0jAd5
7 7 ,.7i
i*0^1oiZl
A
. 7 x.7
ZVl£L»_0|
as in Ethpeel.
A^jAd?
t&frlLT
Aioiizr
ALcu_o] y
Ak?^o5
tit&c<
wiAkix^Z]
» nj
«u_»Ak)*iD5
y 7 ,.7.
w_.Ak?^lD3Zl
. -n 7 ,.7i
AVn_^.n7]
AS£ui>l'
Ak^iol
. 7i 7 , .71
ZiOjiojZ)
7 7 -
aki_i_oZ.|
qAq_i_q]
'lx 7
nV>.V>i
7 7 1 -i*
qAdjAojZ]
7 7 ,.7t
. »Vo „ n/ |
1 *i 7
. * Vn , n)
^ 7
. » ^n.Vn$
7 7 , .IN
. xVn.Vn37]
♦X 7 7 •
^oAln-i„oZ|
^oAS^u-d] 7
•X ^ 7
xOL&D^DJ
•X . 7 7 , .7*
v oA1d^d3/ 7 ]
7 7 ,.7i
^ALa-k-oZ)
^.Zsa^il'
f 71 7
^.ALdjAd?
Z"f
7 7 7 ..71
». .nz_|
7 I .7
i Vn »_n |
y i \ y
, I^O-VdS
7 7 7 ,.7l
■ lAnjWl
•X P 7 7i
nVn . n/An
•X P 7
qAo.qAo
•X P 7
qAdjIdjAd
•X P 7 71
q!d^d3ALd
7 7 ,.
^Qu-oZj
^Qj-D*) 7
^Lol
iO^iZ]
. . V> . n71
w^Aojud] 7
'Tx
*_xlD^D)Zl
'TX
alaloZl
olEu-r)] 7
qAdjAdI
lx
oAo^d^ZI
» Vn » n/ |
» Vn » r>*]
»Vfi.Vnl
. Vn[vn*71
7) X
V 1
-TI
'JS 7X
7 7 -n
» .oAj
v> » n i
71 7
7 7 4 7>
1>o^d3Aj
7 7 . ,ti
. . Vn » n/ /
a ^ Vo ft C*) 1
i\ 7 .
^ u Lo i .SD5Z
. > V>»Vr)3/ 7
7 7 « .-T.
^Q^_£DZZ
^Ql.*JdL
71 7 ,
^OjAD>Z
7 7 , ,71
^0;Ad3ZZ
x 7 .
. Vn » n / /
.iAoj!d3Z
7 7 ,.t>
^Qj-IDZ|
71 7 .71
^o^1d3]
io^izf
•X 7 71
^oV?->-oAj
v aLa_i_£U
•X 7
^qIDjADjJ
v qAd^1d?Aj
P 7 7i
•X 7 - ,-n
^qAoa-oZZ
P 7 , ,71
v ^>. nZZ
^aOJ
^QAQj-DZ
p X .
^Sq-»-qZ
^iOfiOsJ
<qAo;1d3Z
P 7 ,
v V?;.k)3Z
P 7 71
v SO;.1^3Aj
^io,so5ZZ*
, V'iVijZZ*
V^ 1
7 7 ^
i>Q-i_.oAj
v>. ni
^ 7
^OjAojJ
7 7 A 71
^o^d?Aj
^q-LoALo '
>Q-i_nlD
^O^DilD
'TX
^o^d?A1d
'TX
!>aaLo
7 7
SnAnAn
102
tt
VERBS ]].
In the consideration of these verbs, we observe,
1st. When they receive an addition to the end
the Olaph is either taken away or changed into Ynd;
thus, ZlL^, A. This arises from the circumstance
that Olaph is seldom found in the middle of a word
beginning a syllable, or quiescent in the middle of
a syllable.
2nd. Participles form the fern, gender according
to the rules given in the Chapter on Nouns; as, jl^
fern. f em *
3rd. Olaph in the 3rd. pers. sing, praet. of all the
conjugations, except Peal, becomes Yud quiescent in i ;
aS, |
4th. The infin. is subject to the 1st rule; but
in other respects it is regular.
5th. In the imper. Peal and Ethpeel sing, masc.,
Olaph is changed into Yud; in the former it rests in
x , in the latter it makes a diphthong with ?; thus,
and wa-XyjZI. But in the other conjugations
Olaph remains and rests in o. In the fern, o makes
a diphthong with In the plural forms the third
rad. is taken away in all the conjugations; thus,
6th. In the fut. tense and participles, Olaph rests
in •»; but before the affixes v o and it is taken
away. Before the affix . Olaph passes into Yud
moveable; as,
103
rt
VERBS ]].
In the plu. prset. Peal of the third person we
have and for ojl^ a ^ ew * n “
stances in the Philoxenian version the Olaph is pre¬
served when the affixes are annexed to them ; as,
they untied him , Mark xi. 4.
Some verbs in Peal change Olaph into Yud, and
are declined as the praeterite of the other conjugations;
thus,
Plural.
Singular.
Q-ir-K*
•
-7\
•
I
• •
7> X X
•
v ;
Z'_* ,-KJ
•
X
_> Zv_»
I
Zli
•
X
7
I x
ZLli-Kt
•
I
The verb w_.A_»j is not of the Aphel conjugation, as
i ^
is manifest from the vowel * being under the Olaph.
It is probably the Peal conjugation with Olaph pros¬
thetic.
A few verbs of this class have v in the sing,
numb. masc. of the imper.; as, drink.
'h
In the 3rd. pers. plu. praet. and 2nd. pers. plu.
imper. Peal* some verbs take the paragogic forms
* ^ ’• ^ *«’
c * *
104
ff
CONJUGATION OF VERBS ]] .
Peal.
Ethpeel.
Pael.
Praat. Sing. 3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1. com.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1. com.
0
>
\ K y ^
7 .7
A^zr
oArl
-Vf
'n 7
W ‘ L "X
. 7 . 7^
A \ I 7
-x 7^
. x 7^
•x .1 7^
T t x ^
7 . x 7 ^
Infinitive.
0 *T\
V 0
•X . D *
Id
•X -P 7
Imper. Sing. masc.
-V!
O 7
<k
fem.
-V!
Plur. masc.
fem.
-n . o
^H z !
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
VS 'TS
■?> T\
h£i
7S 7
V
3. fem.
“jk Z
-M
2. masc.
H.
H ZZ
^ z
2. fem.
^H zz
J. com.
Sf
Plur. 3. masc.
•x • ^
p _
3. fem.
» \..,A i
.* V lt i
2. masc.
v ^r
„
^ z
2. fem.
'Ti T*
' r " z X ;
•7N _ ^
1. com.
V
v
Part. act.
** o
*k
"A *A
U-^Alo
-A 7
V 5
pass.
p
EXAMPLE, 1L. he revealed.
105
Ethpaal.
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Shaphel.
Eshtaphal.
to^r
~SH
to.zr
A^l
Aix^zzr
Ajztoi
to,zr
aj^zzt
A V 1 7
£._l. -it—»
A.^^r
^A^zzr
«a*^-T
AjuS-^_*
A^A^r
tozr
a^ZZ|
-Hr
o^r
^H V ZZ|
to; v zr
v oA^
v azuzqzzr
v oA^
^^A.r
^A^zzr
i A’.rf
1,^.1
’ .'xVA'
1 » \ .. <k
, ,’..x r t A -r
V W '
^ T 1
* .£> 7 71
n »\ ^AVn
•X .P 7
n . \. Vn
A > *
•X .p 7
•X . P 7 ti
n » \ ^-A • Vn
n » \ ^
P 7
\ z !
P 7
\^ z !
P 7
V
\ L !
to^i
to*H
<^!
°v
“V-!
, - ^ u ; 1
• * ^ itV
. .'s .11}
<?
^ \ l
'■
71 'X 71
^ 7 ^
-* 7
71 7
^7 "7>
to->
71 Xi7 7*
~K Z
-Hi
~!Pt? z
wi]L.A-»Z
ti X> 7 7i
H
»< z
bH
^H zz
to^ z
-7N ^ _
^-■A,-Z.to-»Z.
u^zr
„ \\
tor
u^r
AH
v^ zJ
p \ 7 A 71
. \ lt A i
<eV
. P ^ 7
» \ ^
^xzzAi
. I\Ja3
P . ^ 7
» \ .- A 1
,ctowj
:vto
^ \\
^Tx 7
X
^ZJ.ZZ“
71
^ V A.Z
rtof
toto'
U^Aj
\ J
U^jZAj
P\f?
7i 7
V°
W“?
U^ad
^7 ^
U-^Z,-«.1d
.7 7
106
VERBS ML.
45. Verbs ml.
Verbs which have the second and third radicals
the same lose the middle radical in the Peal, Aphel,
Ethtaphal, Shaphel and Eshtaphal conjugations. The
vowel of the middle radical expunged is remitted to
the first. With the exception of this defect and a
peculiarity in the act. part. Peal, the whole inflexion
is quite regular. The Ethpeel, Pael and Ethpaal
conjugations retain both the radicals, and are in every
respect regular. But for the two last conjugations the
Palpel and Ethpalpal forms are most frequently used;
as, he drew , WvVv he agitated , ^^5 he mag -
\ » IS
nified.
The imper. and fut. Peal receive on the second
radical the vowel * or according to the rule laid
down for these forms in the reg. verbs; thus, icioj
he will spoil , he will desire.
In the act. part. Peal the middle radical is changed
into Olaph, but it is pronounced as Yud; thus, *co]5
'TS
is pronounced Ro-yes , $ 11. When an addition is
made to the end of this part., the Olaph with its
vowel is taken away ; as, v » rp ; 9 . \h. The verb
i x
7
'SlI is an exception, for it preserves the Olaph in
the plural; as, . V )v masc. and fern.
x
Verbs which have Olaph for the second and third radicals
preserve both of them in inflexion. See doubly irregular verbs.
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
107
In the part. Aphel the middle radical is sometimes re¬
tained ; but it has the linea occultans; as, » W t\ (n shadow-
i -
ing.
The Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation, is
sometimes retained with the prseformatives; as, no!
to love.
The Objective Affixes attached to Verbs.
46. We have already seen that different affixes
are added to verbs to mark the person and number;
besides these, others are frequently attached, which
may he called the objective affixes; thus, she
has slain thee . If the verb be intransitive, then it
must he translated with some preposition to preserve
its connection with the pronoun. We will first give a
Table of these Affixes.
When a Consonant precedes the Affix.
Sing. Plu.
(.
imper.)
T\
01
V
•X
r - 3
Y
imper.')
01
2nd. pers. masc.
Sing.
»_»OT_»
3rd. pers. fem. Praet. and Nun preced.
Plu.
V
< 9 =
O
•X
(\CL2 3rd. fem. plu.)
3rd. fem. plu.)
p
108
CONJUGATION OF VERBS ^
Peal.
Aphel.
Ethtaphal.
Praet. Sing. 3. masc.
7
Vo
lizzr
3. fem.
z£
zb 7 zzr
2. masc.
L\L
z^T
z^izr
2. fem.
-zv^r
-ZiaiZr
1. com.
Oo
r^r
ztzzr
* . » -i t
Plur. 3. masc.
ovo
Oiof
• ojiZZf
3. fem.
7
«-»Vo
^ValZf
2. masc.
<oZvZ
v oz^r
.sztizzr
2. fem.
^z^zzr
1. com.
7
7 -» .7
^Jio)
^zzr
Infinitive.
7 -ft
VoId
<X P 7
ovolo
•X P 7, -»
ovoZALd
Imper. Sing. masc.
ido
7\
v^ZZ]
fem.
^V=ZZ1
Plur. masc.
olio
o^r
oirjZZ]
*?\
fem.
^ -7\
^22]
^ “ -7>
Fut. Sing. 3. masc.
•X ^
1CLC1J
-» 7
VOJ
3. fem.
•X
*._»iaoZ
-io2
-ia22
2. masc.
•x
la^Z
li 7 Z
IflZL
2. fem.
I 7>
^-VoZ
<_ia2
^b22
1. com.
•X •,'D
1oo|
.7
V^l
&ir
Plur. 3. masc.
•x ^
^oiou
•X 7
vOVOJ
^2a3
3. fem.
o n\
o y
^2Ai
2. masc.
r\
Cl
<* O/
v ^ 7 2
v o ^22
2. fem.
0 -oZ
4^2
4=22
1. com.
•x ^
ICLClJ
-n 7
VOJ
w22aJ
Part. act.
*T\
Volo
tiZAio
**
pass.
1-10
I
7 7
VoSo
example , he destroyed.
109
Shaphel.
Eshtaphal.
Palpel.
Ethpalpal.
71 7
\!=l*
Ziai
. 'll 7
«— iL\ n •
zKi
71 7
Oy.O.«
^ 7
•X - 7\ 7
<oZy^L»
», * 7
^Zy^L.
7 7i 7
£M“
zioi,f
z^^r
-ZiiM“
ZiaL.V
ofokf
«i=A.r
^L,r
^2£LmT
7 7 7 .7,
71 7
Zisji
Z^ii>
~Z*£>ii>
Zi^i
n\ 7
cyrzyjo
71 7
•X , 71 7
^oZvovo
Tt, ti 7
^Zv^vs
7 71 P
^zr
z^zr
Z^Zf
^.zjijLzy
ztvizr
7 7 ,.71
oy^y^Z|
iSz^zr
^floiazr
•X P 7
oyo-«.V>
•X P 7 71
oy^AjaZD
•X P 7
°1 °1
•x p 7 -n
ovo^oAk)
7
V^-»
7
7
'TS 'Tt
^v^L>l
oy^L»]
,__,y^L»]
-n "" *7*
*3>
— V3|T>
'lx
oy^vo
T\ 'TS
li^ZI
-isiozi
otiyiZ]
7>
7 7
'* 'TS
71 7
)n.i i
-liiZ
V^iz
7> 7 .71
1^*1
•X 7
P 7
i|^-«-J
<oViz
4^z
7i 7
yo.« i
7 7 -a
-ioZl-2
iiL.2
^VaL.2
»a-r
•X 7 71
voy^A-^j
P 7. 71
v VaA^_i
^oL.2
vpL.Z
7 7. 7,
71 7
-^z
\=>v>L
^v^viZ
■n 7 .71
v 6v^iAj
p 7
,VCV^J
•X v .
\0VDV2l
itviZ
71 7
W=v=j
7 7 7i
yn>yr:Aj
-vipLfZ
7 7 ,7.,
y^yjoZZ
I 7 .7,
^VoVoZZ
7 7 ,^x
V^voZ]
•X 7 71
^oyrzy.oAj
P 7 A 71
ip^V^Aj
V a^vizz
4pja^2
7 7 7i
Vciy^Aj
in « v>
7\
7 7
yr^« V>
yc>A-a-k)
*n
y^ynV?
'A
7 7
yzDyznk)
yiyiAk)
-7S
110
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
Vowel preceding.
Sing.
Y
- » ^
, w-iGlO
ai (oi_»)
Plu.
V
•x
It will not be necessary to extend the paradigm
beyond the Peal conjugation, for the others are in¬
flected like it. Whatever deviations there are will be
given. Neither will it be necessary to give examples
of irregular verbs, except that class of them which
have Olaph for the third radical, and of which, on
account of some striking peculiarities, particular notice
must be taken.
The first and second persons of both numbers
through both the tenses do not take the objective
affixes of the same person, otherwise the signification
would be reciprocal, which is usually expressed by cer¬
tain conjugations.
In the praet. the third pers. plu. fern, has two
v i y
forms, . . V-ft-n and one (the simple and the
'h
other the paragogic; each of them takes the affixes.
There is also a masc. paragogic form K n.
Verbs of the sec. pers. plu. praet. of both genders
do not receive the affixes ^ocn and ; instead of
is
them are used the separate pronouns ^cuj and * ij.
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
Ill
47 . Prceterite.
3rd. pers. sing, masc . he has slain.
> . iSj )r> lie has slain me, ...... us , yS^o .
/toe, masc.; \f\n . thee , fem.; .
you , masc.; ^nX^Q ...... ?/ 0 ft, fem.; orV^o ......
tow, aiX^-o . tor, |Clj] . /toft, masc.;
..... .. them , fem.
”7* -71
3n/. jpers. /m. AX-A-Q slain.
'TS
^J^X^jD to .toft ffttf, <AX^lO . ft. 9 , ^AX^O
. /toe, masc.; . thee , fem.; ^aX^-q
y y
. g/oft, masc.; -^q AX-^q . 2/0ft, fem.; oiAX^o
'JS ‘is -7)
. toft, <jiAX4£> . tor, ^qj) AX^jd ...... /toftz,
'Ti 'TN
masc.; AX^o . /to/ft, fem.
7l7> -n
smy. m$sc. AX^Q.
w»JaXXo /toft tos/ stoft /ftc, ^AXXo . fts,
^aiXAXXa
a2i4d
masc.; aX!&jd *
TST*
y
2 m/. _pcr.?. sm^f. /<?m. .-jAX-^JD.
. . t .A\^q /to toy/ s/to
X
?fte, ...
X
vjOiq-.AX^jd
1
.tow, cruAX^o
X
Tl
y
masc.; v^AX^o
-7> -n
. •
112
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
lsf. pers. sing. L\J^O .
1\ -7N
. thee, masc.; .fem.;
.q^AX^d . yo?/, masc.; r _»^A\4o . fem.;
^ -7N
cnAX^o . cnAl^uO . her, ^qj] AS 40 .
-7. » "»
them, masc.; <r^ A\4° . them, fem.
-71-71 "71 "7>
3rd. pers. plu. masc. 0 \ ^S) or ♦
. » m\-^ Q . *»£, . ^a\^-0
. thee, masc.; ^.ooSs^o . fem.; ^nn nVjl n
.yow, masc.; . you, fem.; ^oioX^-o
. him, m n\^ .n . her, ^qj] o\g\ o .
*T\
masc.; n\\ n . /Am, fem. The other form
/ T\'t\
takes the affixes of the 2nd. pers. sing. masc.
3rd. pers. plu. fem. «._»_X4° or _.a_.\ §jO .
'TS
. . iSf^Q . »«e, r ^4Q . W«, ^.S^D .
thee, masc.; . . n\K n . thee, fem.; ■ o-'A \ g .
T\
you, masc.; » n\ ? i\ n . you, fem.; . . m . .
ns
him, cjlL^o . her. The other form takes the
affixes of the 2nd. pers. sing. masc.
2nd. pers. plu. masc. xOh^J^O.
— ..me, ^Jo^AX^-o
0 -X. . 7 ,
us, w>cn_i_jo
D
him , criio x AA4o . her.
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
113
2nd.
plu. fem. ^A\^.Q .
4 -L .-1 1 ->A^uQ
. ?w<?, .
us,
<tu_La1 ^ .
Am, cru^AX^o ...... A^r.
T\
y
1$£. p#rs. y/w. ^\^Q.
^ 4 ^ .
thee , masc.; . . ->\\\n .
*r»
thee ,
fem.; K asiilL^n ...
... //ow, masc.; .
T\
fem.;
. Am, ou-X^jd . her.
Infinitive.
'TN
. to slay me , r 2Li^nSp . us,
7>
.. masc.; . » nVjXoVn . thee , fem.; ^Vfrnvn
-7\ t> ^ -n
.. ^o?/, masc.; »n\^nv> . f/ow, fern.; mVftnVn
T* 7> ^ ^
.. Am, oiIL^qSd . her.
7%
Imperative. V\o A n
sim/. masc.
. . i .7W£, ^So-fejD . W«9, ^OT-i^a^uO
.. tow, cn »\a4-0 . her.
2nd. pers. sing. fem. *.-x.\d^JD.
x
> >.i\ajD . wje, r la4o . w»9, «- »crio . \n. A. o
X X
.. Am, m . \ n ^v_n . ^Aetf, fem.
8
x
114
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
Plu. numb. 2nd. pers.
, i A\ j/ o n . me, ^^clo . us >
. Aiwi, cnaX^Q-o .
2w</. pm. /m.
,, ‘A . me, _iia&o . us, ^.ai^-Sa^o
—’ s
. ai^CL^o . her.
Future Tense.
3rd. pers. sing. masc. ^> 0 &QJ »
'fs
. . A K en . we, ^4nj . “•?> .
/7^<? ? masc.; ^ n\t)ci 2 . 77n?£, fem.; .
-r> "!>
masc.; ^ > n\o j)cu . y ou > ^ em> ’ --»cticlx
' ^ Tl 71
. Aiw», cfi i \ ^ gj . her.
x ^
2nd. pers. sing. fem.
i i\
.' . 1 . \ j\.n Z . we, . 1 .A4oZ . «s,
^ « XX ^
x x 'i'
. » 1 . /wwz, 0U.
- T ^ i -»>
/«£/•.
3rJ. pm. plu. masc. ^ o\4d . 1 »
., 1 io^^j . me, JaX&aj . US, ^jqVj^dj
_ ^ 'ft 'Ti
-7\
. thee, masc.; ^oj qV (\qj . thee, fem.; *
* *
. you, masc.; . oin\frnj . you , fem.;
V is ns
. jqX &qj . 7^^m ? crua^nj . her.
OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
115
3rd. pers. fern. ^-Xi^QJ.
* 7 \
wi.3i X&n i . me, i . us, i
'T) T\
. thee, masc.; . . thee, fem.; ^qALX^qj
. you, masc.; » ^ i X (\ m . you, fem.; ^cn >, i X-&n^
. him, cniX^nj . her.
Participles are seldom found with the objective
affixes; when they are, the modification they undergo
is the same as that for nouns.
48. Observations.
Prceterite with Affixes.
It will be observed from the foregoing examples,
that verbs and nouns have nearly the same vowel
changes; thus, when it takes the affixes, remits
the 7 to , which is similar to In
the other persons of the sing, the vowel is retained
on the second radical to avoid three letters coming
together without a vowel. In the third person plural
of both genders the 7 is put back on the first letter,
o receives x , and of the fem. is taken away. The
first and second persons pin. preserve both vowels un¬
changed.
Verbs having * for the second rad. retain it in those
places where 7 is found in
Verbs having Olaph or Yud for the first radical
may he referred to for whenever is destitute
of a vowel, there Olaph has ^ and Yud when
has 7 , Olaph and Yud have the same.
Pael, Aphel and Shaphel conjugations retain the
8—2
I
116 OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
first vowel immoveable, but the second they change in
the same manner as in Peal.
The affix ^cno is used after Yud, w»cji after those
which end in o servile; this is the case throughout
the conjugations.
Infinitive.
In the infin. Peal the last vowel is taken away,
except with the suffixes Ad and ; but if it be
as in verbs having Vau the second radical, the vowel
remains. In the other conjugations having the termi¬
nation o, l is added with the suffixes.
Imperative.
The imper. of all the conjugations, where the middle
radical has any one of the vowels x , 0 or % does not change
its form in the sing., and inserts Yud before the affixes.
The vowel o in the plu. masc. is remitted to the first
radical.
Pael, Aphel and Shaphel conjugations, when the
imper. agrees with the praet., cast away the vowel of
•x y
the 2nd. radical before the suffixes; as, . .m n\n n] bring
him. But verbs having the middle radical j, o or u ,
as well as some paragogic forms, retain the vowel; as,
> > m A ] do me good.
Future.
The 1st. pers. of both numbers, 2nd. pers. sing,
masc., and 3rd. pers. sing, of both genders preserve the
second vowel before the affixes and ; but it is
lost in the others. The remaining persons keep both
vowels in all the forms.
OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
117
The verb
The forms which end in 1°, viz. praet. Peal m.;
Imp. Pael, Aphel and Shaphel in 3rd. pers. sing, masc
cast away ], hut retain the vowel by which the suf¬
fixes are annexed to the verb; as. . . i \ ^
^ In the Inf. Peal the } is changed into move-
able; as, . > i » m 1 \ ; but before
and the ] is removed, although o is retained; as,
v:
•X • "* mO
OSL^D, ^\ ^ 0 .
Those forms of the verb ending in }] such as the
futures and participles, when they use the affixes, are
accustomed to change ) into the vowel being re¬
tained ; as, * > ^ ^ >;» > \ .
There is this peculiarity in the forms terminating in
o, viz. that they change o into oo or oo; as, ^oiooX^,
« . X .. 1 0 0
The form o_/, which is the termination of the 3rd.
pers. praet. plu. of all the conjugations except Peal, is
changed before the affixes into al ; as, n »m i they
x
tempted , . „ in » mi , . . o . m\ .
Those parts of the verb which end in , the vowel
x
is either expunged, and the ^ becomes moveable, or
both _ and 1 are retained; as, > > \ » 1 »
kj OHQ—
118 CONJUGATION OF VERBS WITH AFFIXES.
Suffix Sing.
1. Masc.
2. Masc.
2. Fem.
Pra?t. Peal. 3. masc.
^X
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
x ^7
*.i 1 i \ 11
1. com.
Plur. 3. masc.
wj-DOCL^^
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
D ?l ^7
1. com.
* ^
. i m
Infinitive.
7 ♦ *
. » t » \
’“"XT
XXr
Impcr. Sing. masc.
fem.
X ^
Plur. masc.
b ju. J 0 Q_^_^
fem.
•• P • 0
... i . V tt i
. .» V tt ^
r lit# o. iiutot.
n\
Plur. Retains the form of the regular verb.
Pael. Prset. Sing. 3. masc.
7.7
* V 7
3 fem
. . 1^\ I \
. . nA r \
Plur. 3. masc.
* V 7
. .n » \ ..
•X . 7
The other persons follow the form of the regular verb.
Aphel and
Imper. Sing. masc.
V 7
^X
fem.
I . P 7
Plur. masc.
•X .7 7
w_uJoaX..
fem.
P -Pi .7 7
EXAMPLE,
he revealed.
119
3. Masc.
3. Fem.
1. Plur.
2. Masc.
2. Fem.
x , p
v“H
71 . P
'IN-P
cnAA^.
mAl«
u 0"L» A \
(71 Q_» A-iAA-y^
C7L»A_»-X^
oiA-JL*.
OlA-kA^e
.onA-L^L.
» oA . \ . t
T\
V
. ,mnn
• * -7
aioaX^
v°*\
•X -X .7
^cidoqA^.
x (X .7
^oqA.,.
£» ^
ai^
p ^
•X P .7
71 P ^7
^\v
• P -X .7
ouoA i \«.
,JoZlJA
A
* p A ^
U 1 .l.^ lm\ > I N 1 »
p <7
• P ^7
•X P .7
7> P .7
t* •
m . \ ,. V)
• P -
m . \ Vn
7 .
.\ [t V)
•X P .
t no.\ lt Vn
^ 0 -
A .. Vi
V.
^rr
x ^T7
k AT
1
v p
«—>010Qi ^Vi.
aioaS^
v aai \V
•• o
• 0 mD ••
a ^H
p fp ••
v *
m »_ \ .. i
. V . t j
*X * “7>
.nnA,. i
'K m 'h
i * » V.t i
n\ Vb
-71 Vb
' i “r'r
71 v 7
• P • 7
7 .7
. 7
71 . 7
• P 7 . 7
cnA_»_X,.
\ ?« y
-X A 7 \ 7
^cldA > ,\ ^
•» . 7 t *
^j-dAj-X^
•X . 7
• -X - 7
•X . 7
•X -X . 7
v CL2Q-i--\^
7i -X . 7
Shaphel are joined with the affixes in the same
manner.
< 7
• .P 7
< 7
• .P 7
“’"tH
•X ^7 7
<w_i cnoa_-^
• -X .7 7
cnoa_-.^
•X .7 7
v oa H
P .P 7
• r ^7 7
au -^tH
p .P 7
120 OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES.
There are many parts of the verb which follow the
regular forms of in every respect, viz. the paragogic
forms, the 3rd. pers. sing, fern.; 1st. and 2nd. pers. sing,
and plu. praet.; 2nd. pers. sing. fern.; 2nd. and 3rd. pers.
plu. masc. and fern. fut.; and the inf. of all the con¬
jugations, the inf. Peal excepted.
Some instances are met with in the 3rd. pers. plu.
masc. of the Peal conj. where the 3rd. rad. Olaph is
retained with the affixes; as, they have built
it. This remark applies also to the 2nd. pers. plu. Imp.
of both genders; as, v-»<no|-^» loose him , John xi. 44.
This custom of preserving Olaph is also found in the
partic. Peal as well as in the Imp. sing, and plu. of all
the active conjugations; as, . .]i m hating me , Ps. ix. 14 ;
. . i shew me , Cant. ii. 14.
In the futures, where Yud quiescent follows the last vowel,
before the suffixes another Yud is sometimes added; as,
. .m . .. ml ]] do not loose it. Amira, Gram. Chald. p. 377.
Hoffman, however, doubts the truth of this, and is of opinion
that the Yud has got into the text in this and other places
through the carelessness of editors. See his Gram. Syr. p. 230.
In 1 Cor. xii. 31 we have an example of the Yud being re-
•X 7 **
jected; viz. I will shew you. Sometimes we have
1 used for especially before the affixes of the 3rd. pers.
sing, fern.; as in Peal, Matth. ii. 19, m « i he would dismiss
him.
In 3rd. pers. prset. plu. fern, the common form is joined
DOUBLY DEFECTIVE VERBS.
121
with the affixes much more frequently than the paragogic; as,
o •• y * 9 y v
. . m . . m ] they healed him , is found rather than .. . m » \ » » ra ].
49. Doubly defective Verbs.
The irregularities in verbs, it has been already
observed, are produced by having a radical, one of
the letters Olaph, Vau, Yud or Nun, which in certain
situations is dropped, or the second and third radicals
the same. There may be roots having more than one
radical, such a letter as is subject to elision or quiescence.
Of course it will not happen at the same time that
all the letters will disappear or become quiescent; for
the principles on which these peculiarities depend can¬
not operate simultaneously by any combination of cir¬
cumstances so as to produce this effect. It will therefore
follow that some letters of the root must remain in
every part of the conjugation, and that in general no
two consecutive letters can be at the same time sub¬
ject to defect. It will be sufficient to consider a few
instances of doubly irregular verbs, which may be divided
into the following classes.
1st. Verbs with the first radical a Nun and the
third Olaph; as, lie injured , Ethpeel where
X
Olaph is changed into Yud ; Aphel where the
x
final Nun is dropped: so, he tempted , imper. Aph.
7 f
Q£0|.
2nd. Verbs having the first and third radicals
Olaph; as, jZj he came , fut. Peal ]Z]j, which possesses
IS IS
the defects both of ^ 3 *) and tU v
122
QUAD RI LITERAL VERBS.
3rd. Those with the first radical Yud and the
third Olaph; as, }Lq_> he swore , I have sworn ,
i IX
]vn. i he will swear , }1d}Ld to swear.
4 th.
Olaph.
o]i, inf.
Verbs having the second and third radicals
he forbade , whence 3rd. pers. praet. plu.
imper. he laboured , Aph.
ns i
we will make thee wearied.
ns
p
1L it is fit , and a few others are altogether de¬
fective and anomalous.
50. Quadriliteral Verbs.
The Syrians have some verbs composed of more
than three letters; they are not numerous, and as in
Hebrew and Arabic, are chiefly derived from triliteral
roots. They are formed by the addition or repetition
of a letter, and undergo little or no alteration when
the prefixes and affixes are annexed.
I. By the repetition of one or two of the letters
of the triliteral root, and chiefly in those cases when
the second and third radicals are the same, or the
middle radical Vau (see $ 42, 45); thus,
he dragged along , from 5^ he dragged;
An ; Ln, ? 1 he was exasperated , from he was bitter.
he did often , or practised , from he did ,
ns
or made; he was made , or became lazy, from
ns
A he was lazy. It will be seen from these and
QUADRILITERAL VERBS.
123
the following examples, that the general effect of the
duplication is to give increased intensity to the signi¬
fication of the original word.
II. Instances of two of the radicals being repeated
are he dreamed for a long time , from
he dreamed ; \\^\^ he stained , from he
exalted , from i>oo5 he was high.
III. Some appear to be compounded of two verbs;
as, \ vvn ^ 1 he thought basely , from he was base ,
and he quarrelled.
IV. By the addition of a letter to the beginning
of a word.
(1) Ld; as, he made poor, he be -
S ? '
came poor , from the Arabic he was poor.
( 2 ) *£d; as, ^ocnj-CD he hastened , he burned , from
v
^cn5.
(s) Z; as, . vA*) he taught , from r vn\ he learned.
7 >
The letter Van is sometimes inserted in the middle
of a word; as, jJdqa he twisted , ^aLZj he was per -
7* 7>
plexed , from the root ,nv he bound; ; Anm he expected ,
from
Sometimes we have ; as, from ^o;
• •
124
ADVERBS.
as, r _sn!kf> he persevered , from ^ he was strong.
>; as, and rev °l ve d-
At the end of a word we find sometimes the letter
w_»; as, wiZuui he made domestic , _ . A»A /] he was
i i ^
y
treated familiarly , from A » o a house; _A_k>Z he sub-
'D x
dued, from aZjZ under, beneath.
It is unnecessary to give more examples; we will
only observe that, in the process of conjugation, these
verbs follow in general the principles laid down for
triliterals.
51. PARTICLES.
Under this term may be comprehended words which
are used in explaining, modifying, and connecting the
principal parts of a sentence. They embrace, there¬
fore, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Inter¬
jections.
Adverbs.
1st. Of time.
Ij-kk once, together , ^Akf) when f ViIdZ] yesterday,
VZjjLo in the end , at length, afterwards , .p_.cn
then, ]_»cn now , liioaJ to-day, -fo already, now,
kVOoZi before, ] r .*>AD immediately, to-morrow,
!>ooA1d at any time, not yet,
ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS.
125
ns /onfr ns. how lonr ?? ]lm\ ]vn { ? v until now. .
'h n\
suddenly.
2 nd. Of place.
where ? |d here, hither, hence, ]n.]!
'TS
whither? which way? ^_,cn^ hitherto, _k)Z thither.
Adverbs of various kinds.
Ui 4 /joto ? greatly, powerfully, >cl*>Zx
ow/?/, Wvn ludWov , especially, ?woro, .
truly, fbL more, quickly, W.^Vn little, ^ x A
swiftly, oZiiAo formerly, ASo]o (for ZjAojs I have
n\ 'JS *
I J'
namely, especially, ao, ^05 whether ? A. nn)
X
truly, o^l where is he? which is formed from the adverb
p 7 ^ p ^ p
and the personal pronoun ooi, ^SoZ5ai from thence,
/rora whence ? \\ > nvn wozo, mzw, ,-vn
wholly, effectually, really, ]X oZL wo/, ]cn ]] wo/?
aZ-_>Z| lastly, AI Vy o ^rs/, Zo,iZ.jZ secondly, A_»"|cnZL
- x
divinely, A_*la_*?i justly.
X X
Prepositions.
Some Prepositions are prefixed to verbs, nouns,
&c. and others are separate words. Those most com¬
monly used are ^ ?w, X /o, Za\ /o, zo///z, t _Sd from,
..i»o or A1 » A between. , v\o without\ fi? with-
126 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
out, iLh after , Ado?, ^lLkj f /or, 5^,
about, V\A_n n_\ against, ^|lo because of ^ wpow
or against , s ov ww7//, ^o r io before, Zod> wortr,
against, |Lo?qZo before , ZaliZ or Zu_k>Z under .
Conjunctions and Interjections.
•\ y ~ o Z
These are o') or, Zoo], I^qd] rts, ft] a’AXa, Aw/,
^ |]"j //‘ wo/, unless, a^k ft aZL ?*/* wo/, ^ if,
*1\ 1\ *t\ OS T> "7>
rt/so, besides, Aw/ yo/, however, i+^ydp,
for, ? because, ^ ll, but, i^o?? Zos/ Ay chance ,
\\. n m therefore, o rtwd, ^ when, >_» n therefore, vX
i
/rw/y, ?]io zu/fow, Vv. ^>vr> therefore, ft^ before,
'h x ^
that, until, ^£>1 rt/so.
The Interjections are ]oi behold, p], ^pj O/ ^oA_»],
O /Art// w_»cti woe! / jorrty.
SYNTAX.
i
52. Syntax of Nouns.
The Noun which is put in a state of construction
must precede that which qualifies it or limits its sig¬
nification ; thus, cnlo] the womb of his mother ,
'TS 'TS 'Ti
^ mm division of my goods. This is the
reverse of what takes place in Greek and Latin, where
the second noun is the one whose form is modified,
and this modification is termed the genitive case.
The genitive in Hebrew is indicated by the first
noun being put in the constructive state; but besides
this mode in Syriac, it is also very frequently done by
placing 5 before the second noun, as will be presently
more especially noticed. The reason of the latter method
may he this; viz. that many nouns in the masc. sing,
and plu. fern, having the same form in both states, it
became necessary to introduce some mark of distinction.
Hence it is that we find examples of the constructive
state for denoting the genitive are much more frequent
in the plu. masc. than in that of the sing., and in the
sing. fern, than in that of the plu.; as, ]k)ocnZ . »
p y
faces of the deep , Gen. i. 2 ; ]1 . . i sons of
Israel , - »^n o I o l n the days of Noah , Bar Heb.
128
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
397. 2 ; joiiL . ^ Vo words of God , . . i • years
of my life , Ephr. Syr. 3. 428 ; AjL? judgment
i
of the Lord , Ephr. 3. 128. Other examples, where the
absolute and const, states have the same form, are
cl^, yl, ^ool, and many more.
Two nouns sometimes come together in regimen, and
p 7 **
the second has the force of an adjective; as, ]i > > otj>1
x
the right ear , Luke xxii. 50; thy right
x
Matth. v. 29- See § 22.
The genitive is used not only actively, but passively;
i. e. the noun which is put in the gen. is not always the
subject, but the object of a preceding noun ; as, Jud.
ix. 24, > \npyjj ^CTIQJLC) » ? the injury
x “ I
(done) to the seventy sons of Naduhel; also in Isaiah
xxvi. 11 , we have ]sqZj cjlLl^ envy (at) the people.
Proper names, although they seldom receive a geni¬
tive, yet the names of countries, cities, rivers, &c., for
the sake of an accurate description, do sometimes admit
of this construction ; as, Vjoctuj So Z. \ A » A JBethlehem
X
of Judah, 1 Sam. xvii. 12.
A noun is often found in the constructive for the
absolute state, when it is followed by another having
a preposition prefixed; as, . . Ami acceptors of
faces , i. e. hypocrites , where we have . . Am i for
Matth. xvi. 3; n An n blessed among
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
129
women . where we have for Luke i. 28;
X X
VZo denying kindness, i. e. ungrateful ,
for , 2 Tim. iii. 2. The preposition is
x
sometimes separated from the noun ; as, 1 5
'Is
1 Tim. i. 10, where we have . > An » for »on 1 .
i
The definite state in its primary office is undoubt¬
edly intended to express a definite sense, i. e. it is used
to direct the attention to a particular object or objects
known either by their universality, pre-eminence, or
described previously by some circumstance; as,
A the hour was come , 15] 15] I am the vine.
It occurs in all the cases where the Hebrew article is
used, as may be observed by comparing the Hebrew
Bible with its Syriac version. From the same com¬
parison it may be also seen that Syr. nouns are put
in the def. state in numerous instances where the
Hebrew article in the corresponding words is omitted.
Indeed this state has become of much more general
usage than in all probability it originally was, and
numerous instances are found where the definite form is
employed, which seem to shew that it and the absolute
are put indiscriminately for one another; for there is
no apparent reason why one should have been used in
preference to the other. The consequence is that no
certain rule can be given for using the definite state;
at the same time its analogy to the Hebrew n is very
certain, and there is no doubt in the early period of the
language it was bound by the same laws.
9
130
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
When the discourse is respecting some individual
thing of a species, the def, state is used frequently in
connection with some such word as ^; as, ^ jln-i
• •
p p , _
a certain youth , Mark xiv. 51; } r ^> ) 22 a certain fig-
x
tree , Matth. xxi. 19.
The def. state is very frequently found, where
in Hebrew the constructive would he employed; in
such cases 5 is usually prefixed to the following word,
but not always; as, feast of the passover ,
John xiii. 1 ; jZujacL»Z the glory of God ,
John xi. 4. See § 21 . This construction may be equi¬
valent to b in Hebrew, which serves sometimes
as a circumlocution for the constructive state.
The proper names of men do not admit a definite
state. A few appear to have it, because they termi¬
nate with the radical Olaph ; as, Peter; but
x
such nouns are in the absolute state.
A noun is put in apposition with another for the
purpose of defining or explaining more clearly. Hence
we frequently find used in such manner nouns like
A_i_r> a house , l2.5Vy. island , a city , &c.
with an affix, when placed after the substantive, may
be mentioned; as, aukD people , all of them, i. e.
all the people .
The noun coming after the verb as an accusative is used
to denote Latin forms of speech, secundum , quod attinet
ad; as, ^5] ]^lco3ap only (with respect to)
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
131
the throne I will he greater than thee, Gen. xl. 41 ;
^ocriXr) » i vn (according to) the number of all of them ,
i
Job i. 5.
In Hebrew the particle riN is sometimes found before
the subject noun, but the Syriac has not imitated it in
this respect by the use of the corresponding particle tL .
Nevertheless there are some examples of the prefix ^
^ y y
being put before the subject; as, m \»o ctl^
whether is it (oiS) the offence of the cross
x
ceased? Gal. v. 11. See also Matth. xxvi. 11; John
xii. 8.
A 'plural of excellence the Syrians have not, except
a few instances which are found in the version of the
Old Testament, and which may be consequently re¬
garded as Hebraisms. See Ps. v. 1.
The repetition of a noun sometimes denotes diver¬
sity, or, a multitude ; as, • V with divers
tongues , Acts x. 46; \ in various times , John
v. 4; ^ affected with many evils ,
IX i x
Mark ii. 17. It denotes also a distributive sense; as,
each a penny , Matth. xx. 9.
I X
In the Philoxenian version some diminutive nouns are
found. They are denoted by the termination or
as, # little son, } in ; o ^ a little man, ] A » mi . vV?
a small fountain, ] mn. o ^ a little man, $ little
9—2
132
CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES.
lamb, ]mno\A a little dog. There is no doubt that v o
is the same as the Greek termination of, and that ^coo 1S
identical with the Latin ending us.
53. Construction of Adjectives.
Adjectives, whether they are used as qualifying
words, or whether they are employed as predicates,
agree generally with their substantive in gender and
number. The exceptions to this rule are the same as
in Hebrew.
When an adjective has the office of the predicate,
the logical copula being expressed or understood, it
is put in the absolute state with the same gender and
o y
number as its substantive, and before it; as, gD?
r So . my sin is greater than .Gen. iv. 13.
An adjective is usually found after the substantive
which it qualifies; as, \ l |Jjo5 the unclean spirit.
n\
Some exceptions to this rule exist; when an adjective
is made the important word in the sentence, it takes
precedence of its substantive.
When several substantives come together, and an
adjective or participle added to them, it is placed in
the plural number and masc. gender. See Rom. xvi. 21.
The word all , is placed before its substantive,
and indulges in a pleonastic use of the pronominal
affixes; as, m\n all the multitude , Acts xv. 12;
jjori v otl\£ all the chief priests , lit. all of them
CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES.
133
the chief priests, Matth. ii. 4; }»m ] m\n\ r ^,]o and
he took all Asia, Bar Heb. p. 39.
In the comparative degree there is sometimes an
ellipsis of the adjective by which the sort or reason
of the comparison is indicated; as, (clearer)
than the noon-day, Job xi. 17; jpAs
. -Vn • ^ioo ^L»5 o] idols and sculptures, (which are
i i
more powerful than the idols) of Jerusalem and Sa¬
maria, Isaiah x. 10. The comparative degree, which is
made by the particle ^_Ld, is sometimes to he otherwise
explained than it ordinarily is; as, ]Za^ _ai
Is there a thing too great for the Lord ? Gen.
xviii. 14; |l»5o| ^ai ]] . ^rn but if the way
be too long for thee, Deut. xiv. 24. So also when
is placed before an inf.; as, ^Zo
my sin is too great to be borne, Gen. iv. 13.
The word ^ is sometimes instrumental in ex¬
pressing the superlative; as, _»Zc£-kj the head of
x
joy, i. e. the greatest joy , Cant. iv. 14. So also JpoZ;
as, ]inmvn ^,po_o the first-born of the poor, i. e. the
poorest , Isaiah xiv. 30.
A small word is sometimes placed between the
substantive and adjective; as, fcAk) but the
king is great. Bar Heb. 335. 3. For the neuter of
adjectives in other languages the fern, is employed;
as, "jj-Ki one thing 1 have asked, Ps. xxvii. 4.
134
SYNTAX OF NUMERALS.
54. Numerals.
Cardinal numbers sometimes precede the thing num¬
bered, and sometimes follow it. The rule appears to
be, to place the emphatic word first in the sentence;
as, two men , Acts i. 10 ; A*
six water-pots of stone , John ii. 6. So also when thou¬
sands are to be numbered, the same observation applies
to the numeral which numbers them; as, v
five thousand , Mark vi. 44, and Matth.
xiv. 21.
Cardinal numbers are frequently found to occupy the
place of ordinals. In Luke i. 59, we have ] 1 1 W * ]ldo 1
lit. the day which is eight , i. e. the eighth day; so
also, ^ in three hours , i. e. in the third hour ,
i
Matth. xx. 3; . v 1 A_» six hours , i. e. the sixth hour ,
x n\
Matth. xv. 33. In many places cardinal numbers are
used for ordinals, and the noun numbered precedes
in the constructive state; as, a! A to the first
year , lit. the year of one , Dan. i. 21; A_» a! m A
'h
]j_k»o lit. in the year of six hundred and one , i. e. in
the six hundred and first year , Gen. viii. 13; Aj_»
IjlD A_» six hundred and fourth year , Bar
Heb. p. 100. The noun ^ . i I is occasionally expressed
after the numeral; see Gen. vii. 11. A cardinal num¬
ber is in a few instances put before its noun in the
y
constructive state; as, in Matth. iv. 25, we have Zjull
| A i . t vr> ten cities , lit. a decad of cities .
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
135
In designations of weights and measures, the noun
which expresses the weight, &c. is sometimes omitted,
though not so frequently as in Hebrew; as,
'ts n\
a thousand ( shekels) of silver, Gen. xx. 16; where the
word ]i oL is understood.
55. Syntax of Pronouns.
The logical copula, as has been already stated, is
frequently expressed by one or other of the personal
pronouns, and that with the linea occultans; as,
I am, ) , »vn\ 7 ; we are disciples. But when
"IS I
existence is meant, the substantive verb is used, and
this without the linea occultans; as, ]ocn ctlo in
him was life, John i. 4.
The affixes to verbs, although usually expressing an
accus., yet sometimes denote other modes of speech,
especially the dative; as, thou hast given to
me. Josh. xv. 19? as if A^>ctl_» : the ablative ; as,
i “
. . » n » distant from thee, Ps. lxxiii. 27. When the
X
second of two nouns in regimen has the force of an
adjective, the pronominal affix is placed to it rather
than to the former; as, jcuo? fen• the name of my
holiness, i.e. my holy name, Lev. xx. 3 ; }Aj^d
x
the city of thy holiness, i. e. thy holy city , Dan. ix. 24.
Some few exceptions to this rule are found; see Matth.
v. 29 , 30, 39; Luke xxii. 50.
The affixes are used passively in some instances;
136
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
as, not my prayers, blit prayers offered up to
me, Isaiah lvi. 7; see also Exodus xxi. 20; Isaiah xxi.
2; Bar Heb. 218. 14.
A peculiarity of the Syriac language is to be met
with in the redundant use of its pronouns; in such
cases as,
1. Affixes when they are placed before Dolath of
the genitive; at least they are of no use when
translated into our language; as, v\ n« mvvn 1
ns ns
lit. the fame of him who is Jesus , i. e. the
fame of Jesus , jAoloij oil the daughter
X 'IS
of Ilerodias.
2. The affix of the verb, when the noun to which
it refers is placed after it; as, mom^ 5^_»o
• 'TV
and he sent , cut it off {I mean) his head ,
'IS I
i. e. and he sent , cut off his head , Matth.
xiv. 10. Sometimes the noun has a particle
prefixed to it; as, ] 1 m\n I lit. he took
ns
him (I speak as to) the child , i. e. he took the
child, Matth. ii. 14.
3. When the affix is annexed to a preposition, a
similar construction is observed; as, TAii cni
in it, the hour , i. e. in the hour . Sometimes
the preposition is redundant as well as the affix;
as, l/Wn n La ^octlo hut in the days , Matth.
ns
iii. 1; cninl with him , with Christ ,
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
137
i. e. with Christ , Rom. vi. 8 ; .A m At llSd
'TS " 7 > 7 \
/row these , 1 Tim. i. 6.
4. The pronoun ocri in such instances as jro ; A X
ocn goeth to the belly , ocn i vn
that by faith.
The pronouns he himself and the same the Syrians
have not, but they are expressed by a little circum¬
locution; as,
1. By a repetition of the personal pronoun with
the particle p placed between; as, p Ajoi
v ojcn these same sacrifices , Heb. x. 1.
'Is 'Ti
2. By the juxta-position of the pronouns ocn ooi;
as, Zooi jloaJ ooi oaio and that same
day was the sabbath , John v. 9-
An affix annexed to the word ^,5 is frequently
x
employed as a possessive pronoun (§ 28), when the sen¬
tence would be rather ambiguously expressed by placing
the affix to the noun or the verb; as, j? nnVn ^oi
X
thine is the kingdom , Matth. vi. 13; cn.X _.50 giX^jA
'TS i ^ ^ X
. .rn n\on p he came to his own , and his own received
him not, John i. 11. These possessive pronouns serve
also to give a particular energy to the word to which
they belong; thus, ^A |i my time , John vii. 8 :
x
this is especially the case when the affix is likewise
added to the noun ; as, ^»A. ? . . Xvn my words , John
138
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
v. 47 ; vo £//?/ <??/£, Luke vi. 42 ; ^Al^a d]±d
X ?\
w_»A_o John iv. 34.
X
A pronoun is in some instances found before the
noun to which it refers, and is placed at a consider¬
able interval from it; thus,
X 'TS "* r\ T\
its foundations are in his holy mountain , Ps. lxxxvii. 1 ,
i.e. the foundations of the earth: ]a 5] occurs in v. 2.
Such construction exists principally in the version of
the Old Testament, and on that account may perhaps
be regarded merely as a Hebraism.
On the other hand, examples are met with where
the pronoun comes after the antecedent, but is separated
from it by so long an interval, that for the sake of more
accurate speech the noun itself ought to have been
“is y p
employed; as, Isaiah xlv. 13, I have raised
I 'Ts
him up , viz. Cyrus, who is mentioned in verse 1 .
Pronouns sometimes do not relate to the noun which
is nearest, but to one going before and perhaps separated
from it by a long interval; as, Psalm xliv. 3, y*^)
fenVnvV IIzdo] thy hand hath destroyed the
people; hut thou hast planted them (not the people,
but the fathers , in verse 2).
On the other hand, the noun itself is sometimes
repeated, instead of using a pronoun; as, Gen. xvi. 16,
Abraham was eighty-six years old when Hagar hore
Ishmael to Abraham
The Syriac writers occasionally indulge in a change
of the person of the pronoun; especially from the 2nd.
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
139
to the 3rd. pers. and vice versa; as, Luke xiii. 34,
O Jerusalem , Jerusalem ,
V
Aifri,
m)n\ „ „ . thou slaying the prophets and stoning
i i
those who are sent to it (to thee). See also Gal. iv.
21; Rom. ii. 1, &c. This kind of enallage both in
pers. and numb, is frequently noticed in Hebrew,
especially in the Hebrew Psalms.
Those nouns having only the plural number some¬
times use pronouns in the sing. numb, and sometimes
rr\f\y^n and the veil (faces of the door) of the
temple was rent from the middle of it; but in John
i. 4, we have a plural pronoun }.LLo and the
life is. The dual noun ,_A*.Sd Egypt, admits a sing.
pronoun. See Heb. v. 27 , xi. 26. Collective nouns,
signifying a multitude of men, take a plur, masc. pro¬
noun; as, Bar Heb. 121.15, ^qj] . - o. .n cnAsOj]] m r o>
he led away his family and shut them up.
An interrogative is sometimes preceded by a noun
in the constructive state; as, L-Js the daugh¬
ter of whom art thou ? Gen. xxiv. 23 ; or, which
is equivalent to it, the def. state of the noun is
used, and Dolath prefixed to the interrogative ; as,
A Am i vd? from the hand of whom have I
TV X TN
received ?... 1 Sam. xii. 13.
An oblique case of the relative Dolath is indicated
by connecting with the Dolath a personal pronoun put
140
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
in that case; as, cn^ to him , anS to her , 01X.>
'ts
to whom , aril.? to whom , v qjctl^ them , ^cljctiX.>
/o whom , cjlo m him, ctlq . 5 m whom , » j ctlq m
them , . 3 C7LO.? iw whom .
The accus. of 5 is sometimes marked by this letter
alone, without any connection with a pers. pronoun; as,
y y p p
Wo ^ 05 ] whom He had formed , Gen. ii. 8 ;
, A Wi #// things , which He had made , Gen. i. 31.
Other oblique cases of the rel. are occasionally ex¬
pressed by 5 alone.
The pronoun 3 is occasionally omitted, but not so
frequently as the relative ntt/N in Heb.; as, ]_L,1o
V> and he who was able , where U4 is put for
7 T>
t iLi: See also Ps. xxxii. 2; Bar Heb. 487. 1.
Reflective pronouns (see J 28) are expressed by
] m o 1 with the affixes; as, m.« o 1 Wi against itself
Luke xi. 17: by ]vn n \ n substance; as, ctiIdqj-O Wi
'n
against itself Luke ii. 17: occasionally by heart;
as, m o\o ]*_co and Sarah laughed within her¬
self Gen. xviii. 12. The words wju] and K are
often employed to express any one; as, jIdjj ^
v nW if any one shall say to you , Matth. xxiv. 23.
Again, something or anything is signified by ]2.ao^,
as Gen. xviii. 14; as, Is any-
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
141
thing too great for the Lord ? Gen. xviii. 14. The
word word, thing , is thus used. See Exod.
xviii. 26. So also is . See Matth. xx. 20; Le-
vit. v. 2.
56. Syntax of Verbs.
Agreement of the Verb with its Subject.
A verb agrees with its subject in gender, number,
and person; as, jZj \\ n • > Jesus came , A A
I' Ts
Many anointed , ], . vnV ? olU the disciples ashed.
7s x
Nouns which are used only in the plural number will
receive a verb either in the sing, or plu.; as, joCTi ]» L> <n_o
■7s
U
x
and the life is the light of men , same place. The former
is grammatically termed constructio ad sensum, and the latter
constructio ad formam. Several other exceptions are found
to the foregoing general rule, which, although not so fre¬
quent, are of much the same character as those which exist
in Hebrew.
When several substantives come together, the verb belong¬
ing to them is put in the plu. numb. masc. gender.
Collective nouns are, on account of their significa-
t> 7
tion, joined to a verb plural; as, }1. > .> army , in Bar
7 o x p y
Heb. Chron. 109. 18, n\v. . another army
went up. See also ih. 121. 2. 3; Assem. Bibl. Orien.
in him was life , John i. 4; ] - i V i ^ ]5cnaj
142
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
i. 372. 15. ^ all , oooi *._».kn? ^ upon all who
were with me. In this manner of construction we
find U_l^ 1 Li), and
many others. We have sometimes a noun in the sing,
denoting but one individual, and yet being made to
stand for a class, the verb is put in the plu. numb.;
as, Ijocru? ]Zu_o_» the captives of Judah went ,
Jer. xxviii. 4.
A verb sing, is joined with a plur. noun when the
verb precedes and is put as it were impersonally, es¬
pecially A.*] and A f : as, 1 Sam. i. 2, jjJLo cnS A^A
x
p y "J 7 m ?
he had not sons; Matth. iii. 16, )»vn« cnZ^ _k»A£)Z|
the heavens were opened unto him; AZLeu the
fugitives fell upon , Bar Heb. Chron. 144. 6. 7.
Collective nouns of the fern. gend. are often found
with plu. verbs of the masc. gend.; but this diversity
of gend. may be required by the sense; as, ctlad
» all the earth wept , 2 Sam. xv. 23 , where
p v o
earth , is put people; similarly, Gen.xli. 57, pdj
oZ] all the earth came , i. e. all the people of the earth.
is thus constructed in Bar Heb. Chron. 148. 16.
The proper names of places are for the same reason
sometimes connected with verbs and pronouns of the
plu. masc.
The 3rd. pers. of verbs sometimes admits an anomaly
as to gender; as, ] A ! . - oooi there were camps , Bar
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
143
Heb. Chron. 324. 5; see Mark xiii. 28, and many other
places.
The 3rd. pers. sing, both of the masc. and fem.
gender, in passive as well as in active conjugations, is
sometimes used impersonally; as, it will
be evil to you, Jer. vii. 6; it was good to us ,
Deut. vi. 24; ^aru^o it happened to him , Luke i. 9;
Y »\s ZZ| it came upon thee , Job iv. 5; . > \ ]ooiZ
X
» P
1 Zo?c7lco it shall be to me a testimony , Gen. xxi. 30.
Occasional uses of the Tenses.
Use of the Prceterite.
Events of future occurrence, which are considered
as certain to happen, have this certainty represented
by the verb being placed in the prseterite tense; as,
the people sitting in darkness shall see
(have seen) great light , Isaiah ix. 1; ]Z] ]] ]i t ) \
^ x
|Zaso orZ. yi he cometh not to con -
'Ts X
demnation , but shall pass from death to life , John
v. 24.
There are a few instances in which the prseterite
of the verb ]oai, followed by a participle or an adjective,
represents the imperative; as, A_»ooi Ajf
go thou also (and) do the same , Luke x. 37. This
application of the tense is undoubtedly to give emphasis
to the sentence. For as a prseterite is employed to
express our belief that some future event will certainly
144
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
take place, so is it readily seen that on the same prin¬
ciple this tense may be regarded as the emphatic form
of the imperative, whenever it is so applied.
The praeterite has sometimes the force of the plu¬
perfect; as, his works , which he had
done , Gen. ii. 2. Again, in iii. 1, we have, “And the
serpent was the most subtile of the animals, which the
Lord had made ,
In Syriac, as in Hebrew, the praeterite is in some
instances used where we should employ the present;
y p
as, Ax-» y I know not , lit. I have 7 iot known , as com-
i
prehending the present and all previous time. I
know not now, nor have I ever possessed this know¬
ledge, Gen. iv. 9- The praeterite also denotes present
time when condition and state are implied; as, ]i vn\
y-^>) 7 ^yLQDZ.1 UkAo ,.1 why art thou angry ,
IS •
and why is thy countenance sad ? Gen. iv. 6;
. * • si j my soul is disturbed , Ps. cxviii. (Heh. cxix.)
28. It is likewise employed in sentences in which the
truths enunciated are general, and not at all depend¬
ent on time; as, Ps. i. 1, “Blessed is the man, who
walks not |ll in the counsel of the wicked.” In¬
deed the praeterite in the last example evidently ex¬
presses the sentiment contained in it with more accuracy,
because with more generality, than the present; for we
may suppose the blessedness to he the consequence, not
so much of not walking in the counsel of the wicked
at some particular instant of time, as of not having
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
145
walked, or of not having been in the habit of walking
at any one period of life.
The praeterite is used for the imperfect in hypo¬
thetical sentences, although the future is much more
frequently met with in such cases; as, yjf
we should have been like unto Sodom , Isaiah i. 9.
In a conditional sentence the pluperfect is likewise indi¬
cated by the praeterite form; as, ,_A 5Zo*j...lL»^ ]] olLo
and except God had left to us, Isaiah i. 9-
Use of the Future.
The future is occasionally found in the place of the
present; as, Z 5qj ]^to5clo he causeth them
x
to inherit (or giveth them) thrones of glory, 1 Sam. i. 8.
See also Isaiah xliii. 17.
The future also occupies the place of the praet. in
a few instances; as, 1XL loi^ God hath chosen
a new thing, Judg. v. 8 ; Iv^Aj S sword
and spear were not seen, ib.; ioooj 1 stood
in my place , Hab. ii. 1 ; see Jer. i. 5; Bar Heb. Chr
282. 7. In which places the praeterite is indicated by
the particles connected with the respective verbs.
The fut. is almost always used when the verb im¬
plies something conditional or potential, and this is done
sometimes with and sometimes without any accompany¬
ing particles. Hence it includes all those forms of
speaking, where in English we use one of the auxiliary
verbs, may, can , let, would, &c.; as,
10
146
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
may the evil (of the wicked) come to an end , Ps. vii. 2;
CR. Iqm . . nn^ m/ wr/?y the life of the child return ,
1 Kings xvii. 21; ctiq-i^qj he would deliver him , Ps.
xxii. 9; ^•joq.kkJ let them shew thee , Isaiah xix. 12 ;
^od|Z /Aow mayest freely eat , Gen. ii. 16.
A prohibition in Syriac, as in Hebrew, is invariably
'IS ' 7 * 0
expressed by the future ; as, |] thou shalt not
^ p
i. e. fear not , Gen. xlvi. 3; \oJ^oL JJ
P -7> P
not kill , or, r/o K/7, Exod. xx. 13; ■ .n ]]
X
do not call me , Ruth i. 20. The imper. is sometimes
denoted by the fut. when there is no prohibition; as,
] 5 <tiqj ]ootj let there he light , Gen. i. 3. The particles
? and ]]> are often connected with the fut. when a
potential signification is intended; as, cnZ^ ^Aj
that he would grant to him time , Dan. ii. 16; i
that they may not hearken , Gen. xi. 7. The prefix
o sometimes gives this force to the verb; as, ^oLjjo
that they may know , Ezek. xx. 26 ; that they
may he sacrificed , Exod. viii. 8 ; is also found
y o v v »x
besides > as follows; that my soul
may hless thee , Gen. xxvii. 4. Other particles in some
instances accompany >; as, in Bar Heb. Chron. 530. 14,
. .m . that they might destroy it;
y 'Ts 'Ts y n\
|] ^Vcn] although I should walk...I woidd not
fear , Ps. xxiii. 4. The imperfect conjunctive is often
formed by means of the fut. and the auxiliary verb "jocn;
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
147
as.
7
0001
\ |in . ) so that they were not able ,
Mark iii. 20; ] Ai mi ]ooi ^ol. qAj?
///<? security of the city might he established , Assem.
Bibl. Orien. i. 393. 2. So in Arab, we have the plu¬
perfect and imperf. formed by adding the prseterite of
the verb ^ to the praet. and future of another verb; as,
^ C* **
t_ he had written; he was writing .
See Stewart’s Arab. Gram. p. 80.
Use of the Infinitive.
An infinitive connected with a finite verb adds
intensity to it, or denotes what is signified by the verb
to be certain , fixed or continual; as,
I will greatly multiply, Gen. xxii. 17; <oZolo2 ALolo $
ye shall not surely die , Gen. iii. 4; ]coi 5^k> hath
been accurately depicted , Gal. iii. 1.
When an infinitive is governed by some verb sig¬
nifying will , power or command , it has generally ^ pre¬
fixed; as, U>5o] mlo ]ii_i]o and how
are we able to know the way ? John xiv. 5; oi5 r _» ooi
]y ; v>V he sent him to feed swine , Luke xv. 15;
i **
\ /\oVo\ ]ooi |o^o an( t he wished to slay him , Matth.
-T> T\ ~
01
xiv. 5.
After the verb tool the inf. with ^ will make a
sort of periphrasis of the future; as, (ooio
in— 2
148
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
.n - \vA and the Sun was about to set , Gen. xv. 12;
mI.voVn\ jx? 05 (ji. Herod was about to seek
i
him , Matth. ii. 13. Here the participle is ex-
i
pressed, whilst in the former example it is implied in
the inf. We have a fut. with ? prefixed in such a
construction as the following; as, he feared
i
to go , Matth. ii. 22, where we see the fut. is employed,
when in English we should use the inf. See ib. xvi. 3;
Mark i. 45, 6, 7; Luke xiii. 11; 1 Cor. ii. 14.
We find a participle usurping as it were the office
of an inf. after verbs of beginning and continuing , of
permitting and commanding , and also of power; as,
1 \ 7 \ 7 7
(ln_» they began plucking the ears , i. e.
they began to pluck , Matth. xii. 1; Q_oarn_»
vOOT-JZ they permitted both of them, to grow (growing),
Luke xviii. 16; q n oo . n permitted (him)
to go (going), John xi. 44; IjJLlo ctlS jAd] com-
I 'TS
7
mand her to assist (assisting) me , Luke x. 40;
. x ^ '7s e y n\ o
vQj] that he was not able to receive
(receiving) him, Mark ii. 2.
Use of the Imperative.
The imperative is not only employed to express a
command , but also an exhortation , admonition or a per¬
mission; as, John xi. 15, oo\ m let us go thither;
'T)
see also Mark i. 38.
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
149
The imper. of the verb ]2*| is frequently found in
connection with a finite verb in the fut. tense; thus,
lia ^cunj u U^io and now come, we will make
i
a covenant, i. e. wow come, let us make a covenant,
Gen. xxxi. 44; ol come, we will go, John xi. 7-
X
We have also the imper. in such constructions as
the following; I will give you the best of the land of
Egypt, r n i vn n • a^ar^o and eat ye the fat of
the land, Gen. xlv. 18; qJLkjO n ,r^x ])ai this do, and
'TS 7)
live, i. e. this do, and ye shall live, Gen. xlii. 18.
Participles.
The participle is timeless, i. e. it has no time
of its own, but partakes of every time with which
it may be connected. Thus, pres, most frequently.
The fut.; as, ocri om tfch
X 7\ 7\ 7\ I -7>
Therefore that which shall be born of thee is holy,
Luke i. 35; thy wife shall bear
to thee a son, Gen. xvii. 19. The prset.; as, Behold
their Lord, A. von.]vo5 fallen and dead. Judges
X Ts
iii. 25. Participles, when they are taken as such, and
not for the present tense, have placed before them for
the most part the particle p or the prefix as,
A. o nynAvn p wandering from house to house,
7\ 7s 7S
1 Tim. v. 13.
150
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
The active participles are in some instances found
in the constructive for the absolute state. In such cases
they are followed by a noun; as, descend¬
ing into the ditch, Prov. i. 12; entering in
at the gate , Gen. xxiii. 10; .^. nXX he
n\ i 'Ts
saw Levi sitting , Mark ii. 14.
Active participles sometimes govern the noun which
follows, and in the same manner and using the same
particle as the verbs from which they are derived ; as,
cnX V»3 wi;_» he began upbraiding him , Bar Heb.
x
Chron. 328. 3 ; ^oai^ v they wounded them , ib.
333. 3 ; jiai ] m. 1 1 1 q ^o mXoX n r/wr/ destroying all
the men , ib. 397. 1 •
Similarly passive participles observe this govern¬
ment ; as, l^Q.i . * » ^X clothed with linen , Ezek.
ix. 2 ; fo.a.vno anointed with oil, Lev. ii. 4;
i
. m extending their wings, Exod. xxv.
•x v
OGlx£L^
X
20; ]° ; vnX blessed of the Lord, Ephr. i. 116.
X
Although in Syriac the use of participles is very
great, yet in translating Greek books into Syriac they
sometimes render a Greek participle by a Syriac verb,
especially where the Greek participle is followed by a
verb, in which case the two verbs in Syriac have the
same mood, tense, and person; as, nnX o]i 7r opeuOevres
e^erctaare, go, enquire , Matth. ii. 8; f eXOwv
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
151
TTfjocTKvv^cTw, I will go, I will worship (him), ib.;
p
J>OD I!]? eo )9 eXOcov eaTY], until I came I stood, ib. 9.
Participles are employed to express a gradual but
continual progress or decline of what is denoted by the
verb in the sentence; as, »
i
and the water receded going and coming , i.e. gradually
and continually, Gen. viii. 3; ]_»A2 o an< t the
hoy going and grew , i.e. was continually growing, Sam.
ii. 26.
ip . P 7 7 7
|... a^£)cno
Regimen of Verbs.
A transitive verb exercises an influence over a noun
or pronoun which follows it, either immediately or
mediately , and which limits its signification. The
noun or pronoun may be without or with a preposi¬
tion; as, , ov ? ^rn ] ;. he made many disciples,
John iv. 1; ] • nVn .n ^n^ ]i , What has Moses
* v • *
commanded you? Mark x. 3; 1 p^)? that 1
x t\ n\
may call the righteous , Mark ii. 17.
Verbs which are doubly transitive, such as tran¬
sitive verbs in those conjugations which are causative,
exercise this influence over two such nouns or pro¬
nouns; as, Kclo? cn.a he commanded him
to be clothed with a garment of fine linen , Gen. xli. 42;
]vnv\ ]ocn he taught the people know -
X
ledge , Eccles. xii. 9»
152
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
The passive conjugations of verbs oftentimes express
the cause or motive of action by the particle ^ in some
such manner as the following; v octlZ <o^ZZ> that
o n\ 0 p y
ye may he seen by them , Matth. vi. 1; ctlSd}] Zooi Vr>
she was taught by her mother , ib. xiv. 8; ,qv Aj octi
this may be clone by you , Exocl. xii. 16. See also Luke
viii. 29; John viii. 33; Acts xv. 21, xviii. 18.
Verbs used for Adverbs.
It is not uncommon to see a verb put before
another verb, to which it performs the office of an
adverb; as, \\n« . . w ^° h as taken much ,
2 Cor. viii. 15; oiiotioj ^. . mf hath greatly exalted
him , Phil. ii. 9; I will again feed
'TS
thy flock , Gen. xxx. 31; ^cooj Again
** i 'rs
he spake a parable , Luke xix. 11; they entreated
nr nVov \\VvnA i that it shoidd not be spoken
^ n\ ^
to them any more , Hebr. xii. 19; ^
he changed the letter craftily , Bar Heb. p. 100.
Miscellaneous Observations.
The ordinary method of expressing a reciprocal or
reflective sense is by a transitive verb with the noun
11 united to the affixes. But it is also in some
instances done by means of the passive conjugations;
SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS.
153
as, *_uJ_£>Z1 he turned himself, Matth. ix. 22 . See also
I is
John viii. 6 , 7, 59-
Neuter verbs have sometimes a passive signification;
as, to wander , for to he deceived , 7 rXavacjOai, Luke
xxi. 8; he burnt , for burnt, Matth. xiii. 30;
x
he fell , for he was cast down , John iii. 24;
-oVrn he ascended , for my/a extracted , w/«a /or// ///;, as
/rooA which are torn up by their roots.
Compound words in Greek are translated into Syriac
by simple words, either alone or in conjunction with
another word or particle; as, foreknowing , Acts
x
xxvi. 5; ZjiD] ALDj-o I predicted\ Mark xiii. 23; ^cn 5
7S 7\ 7\ -7V
cjilOjjD he ran before him , or o?/V/ outrun him , John
xx. 4; so with many others.
57. Syntax of Prepositions.
Prepositions are employed in connection with verbs;
thus, *0 is found with verbs signifying to confess or
deny; also many verbs of sense are construed with
, 0 ; as, . . o 4 _» 5 QJ 5 who shall confess me, . »^
XX X 'TS
who shall deny me, cnZakio ^ nie not see
n\ t\
his death.
The preposition is used with verbs of entering
7\
or ascending; as, ji$Z 7 whoever does
is 7\
not enter by the door , John x. 1 , 2 .
154
SYNTAX OF PARTICLES.
with verbs of covering or commanding; as,
he covered , Matth. xvii. 5; , rA he commanded,
2 Chron. xxxvi. 23.
A_l.zd with verbs of separating or distinguishing;
'JS
as, God separated ]n n 1 ]5cnQj A_»^d between the
'n
light and the darkness, Gen. i. 4.
fAo with verbs of coming; as, ]2.*j he came, Mark
'TV
i. 7: of going; as, he departed, John vi. 2;
run, 1 Cor. xiv. 1.
The prepositions \\A on\ against , against ,
and many others are frequently used with verbs;
as, v a^ar)Z resist not evil; see also
Matth. xxvi. 62; Acts iv. 14; Rom. vii. 23 ; Acts
xxv. 5; Hebr. vi. 6, &c.
58. Syntax of Particles.
The repetition of adverbs, like that of nouns, expresses
intensity; as, ^ ^ very badly: or diversity;
I X
as, here and there: or continuation ; as,
v y
^_Aa \\ » \ n o by little and little.
X I
Adverbs sometimes qualify nouns by being placed
before them in the constructive state; as,
x
a little water, }ALdqJ AAq a few days.
ENALLAGE OF PERSONS AND NUMBER.
155
The particle placed before adjectives assigns a
privative signification to them ; as, s o. n ]] foolish ,
X
120 ^- 10 1 immortal.
Interjections which denote threats for the most part
cause ^ to be prefixed to the next word; as,
woe to us!
sclL far he it , is construed with ^ of the person,
and > prefixed to the verb ; as, gi^ far
as a*
he it from him that he should do , Job xxx. 10.
59. Enallage of Persons and Number.
The enallage of persons does not occur so frequently
in Syriac as in Hebrew, and especially as in the Hebrew
Psalms; but some instances are met with in the Syriac
Scriptures; as, of Ale fL L^L
as
m.o 1. A wherefore thou art inexcusable , O
man , who judgeth his neighbour , where we have m ; o I.
as
for Rom. ii. 1, i. e. the 3rd. person for the 2nd.
Also the 1st. for the 3rd. in Mark xii. 37, octi
. .An cnV, ^05 therefore David himself calls him
ik as x
mij Lord , where we have for his Lord „
as
Enallage of number we have in Hab. ii. 15.
156
ELLIPSIS.
60. Ellipsis.
This figure occurs most frequently in the omis¬
sion of the substantive verb; as, ^acoal cnkL»o and
T\
his name was Joseph , cnLao] »V . f those who (are)
7 \
like him , Bar Heb. 328. 12. There are other words
which it is sometimes necessary to supply in order to
complete the sense; as, a subs, in Eccles. vi. 3, ^
T\ 'TS
Ilk) I; o ^ if a man shall beget a hundred , namely sons;
A. <vr). 1 ^ once have I sworn, where is under-
X X
stood, Ps. lxxxix. 35; 1 A-»qA ^>)0 lAk> 1] I
eat not that (which is acquired) by fraud and force,
Isaiah i. 22 .
There are very mauy passages in which a verb of
some kind or another has to be supplied, in order to
y 'h p y
complete the sense; as, _Ak)]J ]kvL until when? viz.
wilt thou bring assistance, Ps. vi. 4; yfnL
thy blessing (may it come) upon thy people , Ps. iii. 9;
l^KK^f l^oZ the destruction of the impious
and the wicked (will come) together , Isaiah i. 28. There
are some sentences in which a word requires to be re¬
peated, in order to obtain a full and connected sense;
as, jlk)Aj 5 Zooi 5 ^5 Ijon but all these things
which were done (were done) that it might be fid -
ELLIPSIS.
157
filled , Mattli. i. 22. See also John xx. 31; Rom. v.
20 ; Heb. vii. 18, viii. 3.
An accusative is sometimes omitted; as, she
i
hr ought forth , viz. Gen. xvi. 1; i he took ,
viz. a Neh. xiii. 25; ^.Sd51 he cast , viz. the lot ,
] Sam. xiv. 42.
such noun as *)•
Also to in John ix. 7, some
is to be supplied.
APPENDIX.
It is stated in § 10, that a simple point is some¬
times used for various purposes. The practice of the
Syriac writers appears to have been to employ a
point, which by its position above or below the let¬
ter to which it is annexed, would determine the true
signification of a word that would otherwise, in the
absence of the vowels, remain ambiguous. It is pro¬
bable that the signification of this point defined in
some degree the kind of vowel intended to be sup¬
plied, and thus served as a guide in the pronunciation.
The following instances of its application, taken princi¬
pally from the Grammars of Amira, Hoffman and
De Dieu, will illustrate the nature and utility of this
sign.
u
u
who ?
u
•
u
I
hand.
ur
ur
is
coming.
Ul
•
o
Ul
is
he came.
i h
0 0
Ul
a sign.
■j c y
[.a.-i-P
wretched.
•
U-vO
I
evil.
^ P D
weeping , part. fem.
X
mourning.
APPENDIX.
159
i
{
!
i
{
r
I
7
OOI
OOI
X
he.
001
•
001
•
w_t oi
0
W-tOI
she.
hjQI
•
W_t01
I
•
,QJ01
•X P
<QJ01
•X
they , masc.
vQJOl
^ ns
•
r ^-J01
^-i-JOl
' 7s
£/?e?/, fem.
^-J-JOI
V -^JQ1
ns 7s
•
5Q-kj
7
5q_k»
became white.
5q_kj
•
7
5Q_kj
white.
OlS
oil
to her.
CTL^
•
Olii
ns
to him.
7
who ?
r^>
•7>
from.
.0 f>
Ir^
•
work.
lr=^
•
r^i
•
servant.
* p p
working.
|Jcll
P P
PctL
unjust .
]]CLL
•
poi.
iniquity.
|]qa
•
flil.
infant.
1Aj_»
IAjJ
year.
1L_.
sleep.
ns
160
APPENDIX.
It appears, from the foregoing examples, that this
point performed the office of vowels; that when it
was placed above the letter, it denoted for the most
part one of the vowels and when beneath the
letter, it denoted x , % or x .
This point was further used to distinguish the
persons and tenses of verbs. When it was put be¬
neath the letter, it denoted,
1. All the persons of the prseterite, the first of
the sing. numb, being excepted. The third person
sing. fern, has this point frequently on the left-hand
side of the last letter Z.
2. The imperative and infinitive whenever any
point is found.
3. All persons of the future, the first of each
number being excepted.
When it is placed above a letter in verbs, it
denotes,
1. The first person of the praeterite.
2. The active participle; as, in Peal conjugation
^..o Pael ^lQSd; unless one of the
'D 7\
letters 1 o «-> requires it to be placed below; as,
!>q-i-Q.V) or Ui > oV).
• X
3. The first person of both numbers of the future.
The following paradigm of the Peal conjugation
of will exemplify what has been now stated.
APPENDIX.
Prceterite.
Fem.
Masc.
(AX40
3rd
AX40
•
•
•
•
•
2nd
1st
•
oXgdD
3rd
/
r
<!>
b
1 st
pcrs. sing.
pers. pin.
Infinitive.
Imperative.
^>Q_^Q sing.
cl ^ o&o plu.
Future.
^ ern - Masc.
. 3rd pcrs. sing
2nd .
^>a&o] i s t .
'$^2-1 3rd . plu.
vOl^oZ 2nd .
^O^qj i s t .
Participles.
act.
pass.
162
APPENDIX.
This point in some places is found with one letter,
and in other places with another letter of the same
word. The distinction is produced only by its situation
above or below the word.
The Names of the Months.
We give here the names of the Lunar Months,
m.D 0 •
|uently in the
Scriptures.
as x
October,
“ t. as
November,
^OrO V QJJD
December,
. p - •>. p.
v a JLD
January,
February,
i?r
March,
V ..Q3 u)
X
April,
A
X
May,
X
June,
laser
July,
oT
August,
September.
APPENDIX.
163
Ths Estrangelo Characters.
The Estrangelo characters are the most ancient.
They are found in the oldest Syriac MSS., are prin¬
cipally ornamental, and often used for Titles of Books.
The following Table exhibits their forms:
a
o
)
1
OJ
/A
*3 ^
yxzn to
SD
END OF THE APPENDIX.
164
ST JOHN’S GOSPEL,
Chapter II.
7 v 7 7
1 Aj_»,Ld ‘jZoA.a.Sn Zocn : ]A^Zj |LdcijlZio 1
0 7 -XT*
w n.m. > ooi v2)1o 2 ,Zooi _SdZ vxo..a- >? aiio|o
• “ n\ 'is x v,
0 7 7 0 * • 7 •• 1
locn ;_ccl_>oO 3 ♦ IZoA-a.SnN oiZi wiQio r tAo-^Zo
Tl P I 7 > ~ 7
.^pCJlZ^ AjZI IfACLhj V\0.» 1 \ CTlk)] ctl\ 1^d]o .)^kLK»
Ti 'TS 'TS
o y
V 0
V\ * v y : IZAj] >.j-o.\o oA |k) ^o.«. > oaZ. £ 0 ] 4
X " 1 > I
7 p 7v p •• 7 p • p p • p
jAd]> V?\ cnlo] IjAd] 5 .^iA^-» ZZ]
p x ••'h p y p y -* •• 7
•Aj» UJ ^__»3 w»oai A^l 6 .o,£H
^3Z ^__»5Z tr^l? *P?OC7L»3 |A-a_23A_l v ^n » rm
jo a 'is x x 7 x
•• 7 \ p y p »9 y •• - 7 ) *x ^ »x 7 p p p •
U^> oZAd ,vio-ja^ ^ooiZk jAd] 7 .]AVZ oj
n *, *. V p 7» p 7 7
^a-ok) q.aqZii . v ootZ^ ^d] 8 ]SDjJL r ^.j] oZiSoo
i ns y •
-*-»3 001 kOLlZ ,i)0 9 .Q-.A-*]o ]nV)TO w&^jZa oAZio
7 D 0
0 7 7 7 -X 0 p»« 7 p p
]ooi vx^ ]]o : l^ki^ ooal? ,qjoi |jlAd ] nVncn
n\ *“ ° • ■
« *X 7 P ^ p M 7
Q-AAd V QJ013 OOOl ^ \ 3 13 -1. Vn « Vn
n\ “ i
p 7 P p
jAojo io /(j/UaZk |oAnco
:1ooi
,3 If-O
p«* y
•x ^
: i-sukA v qj]
a-» 03]3 ]Ado »lA_»_k) ln,^ ]-kiL j*voa^, \ \ A .ctlA
st John’s gospel, chap. ii.
165
f p £>y 0 v x i y 0 y 0
l ,r ^ L I^ »OT_»Zj-^J ^- k ? Aj] |j_>") ^__>,_>01
*• V v 0 p y 00 00 00 0 y
VXQ-*__» lA^-lOjjO ]Z] ^iCTI ])01 11 t^DjA
t> y
* 7 7
V 'TS 0
C7LO d-Lln iCTIO Ot*>A>Q-» ^o]o : ]1 » \ .p ]l j\no
” -ft x V*
^ *X77» »l» P 7 P ^ ^ %
ooi .^oq-k>j^lqa Z_kkJ |)oi 3Ao 12 ♦ :*^oio t . >lnAA
7 71 ” * 7
. 7 7 07 7 .. I ..77 7i
oooi _1 dZo . wicno-ukAZo w^oicAjo cnAjc
x • ^ *" * 7 **
t 7 o n\ 7 \°k 0 ** 7
*AArOO . pr0Ol_»? 1001 Al^JOO 13 .]ASD0l^
71 X J “ X
l?o2 AoA »^kZl»]o 14 : vicLA bA_®3o]3
x ' ^ x
t 77 p *T\ p • 7 7
otA Ailo 15 ♦ r ^oA J 5 [la^ioZo . (jcao A'Ao
a ^ _ _ _
x 7 0 7
•x *x 7 o y
AaA ♦ jlo >01 ,Ao *A£>] ^ooArAo : Ua^> ^Ao |L.;A
x x 7 oi 7i V,
7 X •• X 0 X OX 7-71 .710 . *i' 7 > ^l V
.^£30i ^oot_*3oA£30 actlla^qa j_»|o . j..L 0 ;AVAo |3oAAo
x ^ \ * 7 7
<0
.0 . X 7 ^ ’}'*** 7 7 X 7 • 7
jAoi oAqo it pa_i . -».i^pAo? .qjoiAo 16
P *. P 7 P P
]Z3cAjZ A_»_rO w»A)]> rnA » o\ CTLJOjAaZ Uo .]Ad
Vv/71 X x X x X
o 7
7 •• X 7 7 X
- * i \n i oulj.^3 : ^lAo) ^oiOj-AolZZ opDsZIo 17
7 x 7
7 X X p x x X
Aj] *|Q-kAD U1 i-AO .oA OjAD*)o t? 0 Ol-> -j) OJA 18
„ A ^ K 7
7 **
7 ^ p
.^OdA jlo]o V>CLa. > ]_A 19 .Aj| AA ^.Aoi? .<A
7 0 0 7
]j] S o > nVn jj] ^ AOQj. *|AAZo : |joi |id_>01 o3oAid
n\ o *x x
<r
. y • L*o A?ooi_> oA 20 .oA
X _ „ X ^ -r <■*.
x 7
x
166
ST JOHN S GOSPEL, CHAP. II.
p p o y
7 X •• 7 P P 7 7
Aj) ^OjuqSq __k_SDCi_i ]A\ZZl Aj]o .fjcn flri_.cn wjlJLoZ")
i 'h
x
7 7 p 7 7 o 7 o -n «X
p 22 .cn^^)5 fid .cn ^ ]ccn jlo] ^.*5 ocn 21 .ctlZ.
'Up 777 •• x 7»p
Ijctj? w.aio r lln2^Z o^Z] .lA-uSo ZU-o <_lo !>clc
•X v. y f\ P V. 7 P .. 7
VI »
7\ 7
£o|> ."IZZiLaXo ImArZi a_i_l£L.cno ."jocn
p x 7
•X ^ P
: IjO.pL'O V»j^gLO l<Aj>5oio via_®_» ]oai ^aioA_»l ,3 23
* 7. V. I “ “ 7 I
V \ ” Tl V -n 7 x 7
<--»? ocn 24 . r £OL? |ZoZf oI-k.5 .cjlo aj.ln_.cn IfJL^-CD
• ^ P P 7 ^
•X * ^ 7 *X P 7 P *X ^
oai? -cn «g\i v oaiL *|ocn ^In^cnln ]] vio-a..
* Tl 7>
7 c p o o ^ p 7 P
50xcqj ]oai iD,» im jlo 25 . i \n\. ]oai vi^
^ ^ X “
AJ Uib locn C ^ ail
• 7 P 7
(-• ij^n
ANALYSIS.
1. }1dclLXo And on the day , compounded of the
conjunction Vau and, \ on or upon, equivalent to
and ]1 dqJ the definite form of the masc. noun
ioal, § 19.
* p 0 7
of three , i. e. third. Cardinal numbers with
> prefixed are sometimes used for ordinals, § 54; > is
here the sign of the genitive.
Zooi was , third pers. sing. fern, of the subs. verb.
]ooi praet. tense.
t
])n A feast , a fern, noun def. state derived from
'h
the verb ]A^, see $ 15.
in Cana , composed of o in, and
a proper name.
’iZuL-.yk) a city , a fern, noun def. state; the line
under the Nun is the linea occultans, $8. It is
derived from ^ he judged.
]1 > \ ^ of Galilee , > and )1. a proper name.
aikfjo and his mother, o a conjunction, fern.
n\ is
noun def. state, and the suffix <n, which is pleonastic,
§ 55.
168
ANALYSIS.
^ Vn / there, an adverb.
Zooi was, subs, verb, third pers. sing, fem., with the
linea occultans , because it is the logical copula, § 8.
2. ^]o aZvo, o a conj. ^>1 a conjunction.
ooi he, a personal pronoun used with the following
word as reciprocal, § 55, p. 108.
vicLa-i *Jesus a Saviour , from Hiphil jwin he
' 7 \
saved .
. .mn [Vvn\7 n and his disciples , ,a disciple,
- V I
a masc. noun. Def. form is ] r -k . L n \Z from the verb
x
t vn\ he learned. The sign •• indicates the plu. numb.
a
^aio 7 is the affix, third pers. sing, to a plu. noun.
was invited , a verb, third pers. sing. masc.
I 'TS
Ethpeel conj. from ]*_o.
aiS to it, which is redundant, referring to the fol¬
lowing word, $ 55.
3. looi the pluperfect tense Peal conj. of
the verb $ 38, The line under the cn of jocn
shews that it assists in forming a tense, § 8.
li-Vnl, wine, def. state masc., Arab. it fer¬
mented.
Ifcblo and she says , part. act. of the verb fem.
i\
gen. Peal conj.; the vowel Zekofo which belongs to
the Olaph is remitted to the preceding letter, $ 40.
ANALYSIS.
169
call to him, redundant in this place,
cnlof his mother , see ver. 1.
^oot.2 A. K there is not for them, i. e. they have not,
ZuJL compounded of ]] not, and A_»l is.
x
4. jVd) 1 saith, act. part. Peal conj. masc. gen. of
the verb fn ].
'fS
. . n\ o . . \ ]sb to me and to thee ? i. e. what
■ 7 ) X
have I to do with thee ? Jsb an interrog. pronoun, J 26.
and ._ . affixes of the first pers. sing, and second
X 'T\
pers. sing. fem. annexed to
woman, fem. noun, def. form. Heb. ntSW
— T .
from a man, the W is changed in the Syr. word
into L, see § 4.
not, an adverb, yet, compounded of r i and
x
or Vd.
X
221 l ias come, third pers. sing. fem. Peal conj. of the
'TS
verb 111; this is a doubly defective verb, § 49.
my hour , fem. noun, abs. state const.
7
state which with _ the affix of the first pers.
7
o
sing, becomes § SO.
7
5. otIdI feol, see ver. 3.
170
ANALYSIS.
• 7 > V
noun, def. state, and is derived from the partic. Pael
conj. of the verb . • he served; the •• over So is
'TS
the sign Ribui, and denotes the plu. numb.
whatsoever he saitli , 5 any thing
7 1 \ 71
which , or ivhatsoever.
/o g/ow, pron. affix, second pers. plu. numb,
annexed to
do , second pers. plu. masc. imper. of the
y
verb ; the regular vowel under the sec. rad. is
Etsotso; the Revotso in this word is an anomaly,
$ 36.
6 . wiocn A.*] there were; Zu] is pleonastic, and is
“ I X
thus frequently used; w,ooi third pers. plu. fern, prset.
of the verb "loci.
but , Gr. $e, a conj.
'TS
& there , adverb.
H^l water-pots , def. form plu. numb, of the noun
Heb. 13N*
of stone, this is one of the ways of expressing
an adjective by means of a noun, $ 22.
A ,3 six , a card. numb. fern. gen.
7 >
ANALYSIS. ♦
171
vn'Zcm which were placed, > rel. pron., vn.’.m
X X
pass. part. fem. gen. pin. numb, of the verb he
placed; see paradigm of Jxxud.
lA_i_D)A\ for the purification, ]A_»_ 2 )Z 7 fem. noun
X X
def. state, from the verb Id? to he pure,
x
of the Jews, 5 a sign of the gen.
p • • p p • • c
containing, or which contain, > rel. pron.,
act. part. Peal conj. of the verb fem. gen. plu.
*T\
numb.; •• is the sign Ribui.
Z two each, that is, each water-pot contains
T> 'h
two; firkins, masc. noun plu. numb. def.
i
form is fco*.
o] or; the dot over o was probably put to distin-
7
guish this part, from oj the interjection ; |aSZ three,
a card. numb.
7. r»\vn fill, imper. second pers. plu. numb. Peal
7
conj. of the verb he filled .
them, governed by the verb o.\vn . see § 56.
ilk) water, plu. noun def. form, masc. gen. It is
used only in this form.
* p 7
NF in the water-pots; \ has the signification
of in. See Schaaf’s Lexicon.
172
ANALYSIS.
until, composed of the particles ,1 and
to the top , an adverb with ^ prefixed. Root
Heb. rbp lie ascended.
T T
8. mn draw ye , imper. second pers. plu. numb,
of the verb . It occurs only in this place in the
New Test.
\\. now , an adv. compounded of !>o and .
X 'Ti I
oA_*]o and bring , the second pers. plu. numb, imper.
of ; this verb is doubly irregular, or defective, (J 49.
]nVnm . ; \ to the governor of the feast , ^>.^5 a
X X
masc. noun; it is frequently used with another noun,
as in the present instance, from fnss to recline ,
masc. noun def. state.
cl»L]o and they brought , third pers. plu. numb.
x
Aphel conj. praet. tense. See above.
9 . po and when , composed of o and , p as.
he tasted , third pers. praet. sing. Peal conj.;
this verb has the vowel Revotso; for reasons, see $ 36.
octi a pers. pron., and is redundant in this place.
v ojcn they , referring to .
ANALYSIS.
173
"jocn was knowing , i. e. knew , the imperf. tense
Peal eonj. of the verb the lined occultans under
i
<n denotes ]ooi to assist in forming the imperf. tense.
from , a preposition.
tikuf whence , an adverb. It is used with and
without an interrogation.
he called , third pers. sing. numb, prset. Peal
conj. See ver. 2.
/o the bridegroom , masc. noun def. state,
Heb. jnn.
10 . i Vo i ] the latter word
is frequently joined to another, in which case the Olaph
disappears; as, son of man , or man; the def.
state of ^ 2 lj) is ]_i2].
9
first , the same as 7r pwrov, an adverb.
g’oorf, an adj. masc. gen. def. state; abs. state
is or .
1Zl»_Lo hringeth , the act. part. Aph. conj. sing.
*T\
numb. masc. gen. of the verb he came; this verb
deviates from the class whose first rad. is Olaph in
changing this letter into Yud.
174
ANALYSIS.
> |Lo when , after that ; jib followed by the rel. •>
has frequently an adverbial signification.
o_,o5] 7 they had drunk sufficiently , Aph. conj. third
X
pers. plu. numb, praet. of the verb jo5; the vowel of
the Olaph is remitted to the Dolath, § 40.
then , an adverb.
? iu that which , rel. pron., § 26.
worse , an adj. masc. gen.; the def. form is
X
X
kept it, Peal conj. second pers.
sing. numb, of the verb ; the suffix ,^cn_. is re¬
dundant, referring to the following word, § 55.
Uatl IsbU until note, adverb.
11 . ]*><ji is; j>cn demons, pron. fern, gen.,
w_.cn a pers. pron. in the place of the substan. verb, § 25.
i
ur sign , or miracle , a noun fern. gen. def. state,
Heb. JTitf •
1 A-i-SOj-O ./£/•«?/, an ordinal number fern, gender.
which he did; Peal conj. third pers. sing.
praet.
v^ojb known , or manifested , Aph.
conj. third pers. sing, praet. tense of vi r _,; the Yud is
ANALYSIS.
175
changed into Vau, § 40; the vowel v is remitted to
the conj. o.
(jLKKoai his glory, masc. noun def. state;
the ahs. state is ojan», § 19 ; the root is he
praised , Pael conj.
o \ vn , mn they believed , Aph. conj. third pers.
plu. numb, praet. of the verb _kf). It is irregular in
the Aph. conj. being formed as the Heb. Hiphel. It
is generally construed with ^ or
oxo in him, *o a prep., cn affix third pers. sing,
masc.
12. after, a preposition.
Ijcn this, a dem. pron. fern. gen. sing. numb.
9
he descended, Peal conj. third pers. sing, praet.;
-T>
the vowel Revotso is found in the place of Pethocho,
being an intrans. verb, § 36.
to Capernaum, a proper name.
^<noJu1o and his brethren, noun masc. gen. plu.
numb.; the sing, is plu. abs. state V def.
X
state
oooi they were , third pers. plu. numb, of the sub-
stan. verb ]ooi.
176
ANALYSIS.
^\n few , adverb connected with the following
x
noun, § 58.
jAsbal days, noun plu. numb. def. state fem. ter¬
mination; in the sing, we have ^oal, def. llooZ.
13. and near , an adj. masc. gen. def.
i
p y
state from the verb
x *rs
]o(ji was , substan. verb.
passover , masc. noun def. state. Amira says
that this word, in Greek ?rdo-^a, found in all the Gos¬
pels, signifies joy , and derives it therefore from
lie rejoiced. Pref. to his Gram, where he gives a list
of Syriasms in the New Testament.
he ascended. Revotso under the second rad.,
§ 36 - *
14. a^i»]o and he found , Peal conjugation with
7
Olaph prosthetic, § 36, constructed with
i that were selling , or selling , act. part. Peal.
i
IjoZ. 7 masc. noun def. state, sing. ]>oHeh.
"Vittf, XO is put for 2, § 4, Greek rdvpo s, Lat. taurus.
lijio sheep. One point of the sign Ribui in
this and the preceding word coalesces with the point
of the letter Rish, { 7.
ANALYSIS.
177
]jalo and doves; according to Schaaf from iTP ♦
|jL£) r ikilLo and the money changers; the ^ is eon-
IS
structed with the root is whence
'IS
money.
K > sitting; the Dolath denotes the participle
i
to be taken as such, § 56.
0 0
15. whip, Greek (ppayeWtov.
cord, masc. noun def. state, Heb. *?in, Eng¬
lish cable.
^ocji^sXo and all of them, compounded of o, X
^ and
y
vQ_a*| he caused to depart, i. e. he drove, Aph. conj.
is
third pers. sing, praet. of the verb .o ^ i . The Nun
is dropped for the reason given in § 41.
o y
]1^ > m temple , masc. noun def. state.
jilS and he poured out. The vowel * is remitted
to Vau, § 40.
^nm i es\n \ their money, i. e. the money of the
changers.
v octlAoZv£)o and their tables;
by metathesis Tpcare<[a.
y&m he overturned.
7
l?oAi> masc. def. state
12
178
ANALYSIS.
16. selling , act. part. masc. plu. Pael
X
conj. of the verb
qZ^q..q.-» take , second pers. plu. irnper. Peal conj.
of the verb Vkq » .
hence , i. e. from, here.
CTUOj-CiJlZ. and make not it; a prohibition is
generally expressed by the fut. tense. The suffix cn
'Ti
is pleonastic, § 55.
mA . A\ the house of him; ] A.» f is a masc. noun
'ts
derived from Zclo or he remained , or tarried the
night. The suffix <n is pleonastic before Dolath of
' 7 *
the genitive, § 55.
merchandise , a fern, noun, from ^
17. o^Zjo and they remembered , the Ethpeel
conj. third pers. plu. praet. of the verb Heb. "Df
the l being changed into ?, § 4.
which is written ; ^_,Ad pass. part. Peal
X I
conj.; root he wrote .
fT M iZ ? ^^7 tl ie zeal of it; )JlL£ masc. noun def.
state, from Z><? envious; the affix is pleonastic,
being before ? of the gen., § 55.
ANALYSIS.
179
7 y
. » i hath eaten me; the vowel * belonging to
Olaph is taken away when the object, affix is annexed,
and v belonging to ^ is remitted to the Olaph, $ 48.
18. o ia they answered , from third pers. plu.
preet.; Heh. ruy •
IoIkLd showest , act. part. Pael conj.; root
** i
y
to us. It is composed of and ? first pers.
plu. affix.
19- o5o 1\£D destroy , imper. Peal conj. second pers.
plu. of the verb 5Aco.
W jj] I will raise up ; v> > nVi is the
X 7\ X
act. part. Aphel conj. of the verb the second
pron. is put in the place of the substantive verb; the
part, in this instance denotes future time, § 56.
•• y -m
20. » L*o after forty and six years;
x x
^ in this place has the signification of after . See Acts
xxiv. 17.
. \ was built 9 Ethpeel conj. third pers. sing.
1
masc. gen. praet. of the verb |lo.
21. ]ocji {lol was speaking , or spake; jocn has
the linea occultans , because with the act. part, $iof it
forms the imper. tense of -Loj, § 8.
m. of his body; ? the mark of the gen. pre-
0 y
ceded by a noun in the def. state; masc> noun;
V 12—2
180
ANALYSIS.
Chaldee NTte; corporeal , the adj. and
carnally, the adv.
22. ]Z lLlp A. ^ house of the dead, for sepulchre ,
pass. part. plu. numb. def. of L^o.
x
]50i5 that this , to the demons, pron. is understood
Q
the noun jlio.
]oai jio) he had spoken; ]o<n in this place assists
‘IS
in forming the pluperfect tense of the verb *$£>1, § 38.
q iln . mn, see ver. 11.
which he had said; this verb denotes the plu-
ns
perfect tense in this place.
23. ]ocn wiOio^L] was; the subst. verb being joined
~ ns
to A_»"| with its affixes, the imperf. tense is formed, $ 34.
feast , masc. noun, def. state; root Arab. Ac
x
he visited, second conj. joc he feasted.
many, adj. plu. numb, def., from the verb
]_^CD he multiplied.
o]_k*> when they had seen; > has here the signifi-
V
cation of when. See Schaaf’s Lexicon under this letter.
24.
> ocn But Jesus himself See § 55.
ANALYSIS.
181
m m <?\ i ^om\ ]o01 . mV) tVUSted not himself
to them; ]ooi is joined to the part., and makes the
imperf. tense of the verb ^.Soi, Aph. conj.; ].i>-.£L3 gives
the verb a reciprocal sense, $ 56, p. 114.
because . Etsotso has not here its usual accom-
'h
panying letter Vau, § 2.
looi v* he knew , imperf. tense of the verb v.
i
25. ]ooi -n . im he needed , imperf. tense, Peal
• i
conj. of the verb *qjlcd.
jcjlccu should testify . Optative and subjunc. expres-
*
sions are frequently expressed by the future tense,
§ 56; the vowel Pethocho is put under cn because in
the praet. this letter has Revotso.
Translate the following Exercises, with the help of the subjoined
Analyses, the Grammar, and Schaaf’s or Castell’s Lexicon.
St MATTHEW’S GOSPEL. Chap. XXVI. 1—23.
P 7
baio 1
'T 'J) IS
3 t _jAdclj r -»3Z 3Ari 2
x ti ”7 x* " * x
3 . 6 ^2LO)p? r, ^aiAj>Ao "U-j]? 4 <nii loai
'n 7\ t\ d “ ^ 'n t
% P • P 7 * •• 7 *** p ^ P •• 7 7 7 7 •
8 cnZ3 r A : |kH5 |« . « n n |;-^coo pair) w_»_o3 7 o.a i nZj
^ i
7 7
P P 7
via.a__» 10 GLxik)Z*|o 4 9 l^joAk}5 ]joud
7 S 'TS
0 «X
ooai 5 . la w-*aijuJQZ^njo 11 ^(TU-jo^Ij jlrao?
P7 P 7 P *X p P7P
|ocn jXO 6 .]inx^ ]ocnj V; U
V, 'h 'TS X
15 AifO 7 y^- 0 -*? oiAj-cls .(.i.iy 14 Aj>.ixo vio-a__*
71 71 71 7N 7|
]imo5 V»i»-a.k5> 17 ]A£i j_ 4-» 16 C7i > \\ A_»l> ]ZAjf cni
7 *x 7\ »» / • o. y * y y 7
^.jAqCD jJD ^Q._a_i? (JLa__»? \ix 19 C7lAX^i_»|o : 111 on
X 71 I
7 • P 7 « 7 «£>•• 7
pp 7 -X »«7 7 71 7
]i v>V .otiolo ^ojii "walxjZIo v^cno, > V)\Z ^5 oV-k» 8
7 pp 77 P 7 PPPP7
|jcn 22 ^5p5 t-^-it loai 21 u^xijaXo 9 .]jch kpa]
^ — * T*
♦ ^OCTLX jiolo ,-i) V>Q-uL* 10 . 24 ]i nmVn\ 23 _rXTL»AjO
'TS X *7*
*T\ X 7\
"7N X D
i llaa. .UAjU <ni v oAj]
EXERCISES.
183
y g^V?S A_»] | i nnn^n ^ . 2(5 ,_ot
I x
7 • -X
« ii
—Zal
y y i\ -r\ p
y •* p
27
A^AdI]? ]?ai 12 . <a:A Zu] ^oi\mo ]] w_»A
• y y y y -x 7 p p p
♦ Z^oi : « >V)»a^. ]jcn ka
7 £> P _ P -n
mil
]?ai ^Z;-OCD 38 Ij-^ZZ? 1o4? v am^ ]j] iAd] _i-k}]o 13
'TX ^
P_ 7 _P 7
D 0 -X P *7
l?cn Z r OLi> ^o,Ad *£>1 . 29 'SLSoAj ? )^n\v mV.nn
7 *
Uo_»;oro Ijoctl* IjjoASoj jjcqaJZ ,_Ao ^ ^il cn 14
x 'Ts n\
•X 7
OOP
7 7 p •
^oAj] 31 ^-j-C)^ UAo .^octlA jlolo 15 . jjaio ^5 ZqJa
<_»> ^qjoi .^amZi ctlA ]i] AoN-aSo jj]o : >-i.\ 32 ^AkA
P Tl 0
loai }ao <_Aoo 16 r _.A \L ctlZ. a ^o -i- Q i
I-LsDjJD ,__.> ]k>aJuO 17 . w-iCnci-t-SnX-«.n }v\^ - ctlA
'A -7\
0 v
♦X ** P
7 'Ts
Ti y
1il»1 .otZi ojAo]o . VsG_ie__» ZqZi 1,-i.kAZ QLOf-o : 33 t r j-&0>?
7 7 7 P
^__»5 ocn 18 3S .mA/ ? Aj") to
A
. ctlA OiAo|o 36 ^Jio ZqJa lAjL-iykZL clAj .^octla jAd]
p p p
7 p 7 7
t^»^2) 111 .olA ^.ZqJa .ctla I^Ad 37 ^j_loi : jAd] r o5
7 7 P 7 7 7 •• y 7
r no> b-^-»1 o r oA w»oio r j_kAZo 19
• • • n •
7 ••
fc r
■ V>V Isai
: 'Uio5 )oot ,10 20 . jjj ^0 OOi.^0 • V\Q._a_» ^ocrilm
-T\ <T\ <7\
184
EXERCISES.
or ••y v 7 vo
* mv\ po 21 .^010, > VXZ i>Q_L ]oO! a& ^->_So.CD
I " I H " X
7 *> 7 *X P 7 0 7 7
- ».»A yA alo ^Q-QJ-Vo W -Id] ^Sn)
T 7 \ ^ ™ I
41 ^ oi\ ^o]1clX 40 n_.^»o »..n.£ ^ocriX 39 A1 j^o 22
^ i i ^ *?>
_1d : ti]o ] 1 ± ooi 23 . »__6 ^jd U1 . ^octi.iSo
^ ^ ^ t, X 7 (
V 7 * p 7 7 ^ 7 P
.« vl V?\ • 1 001 «-i.V)S Oly-*]
', >^nV / « disciple , from r A\ he learned. 2 v^_» he
X * * X
knew. 3 ^ool 4 ] Z i]> oi^do and the son of him , viz.
o/ w«ra. 6 ^q2L» he delivered. 6 .^n ] he crucified. 7 . • i o
he assembled. 8 15? palace , or /W/. a ] ; p he called. 10 ^ Xvn
in the Ethpaal, he considted. n r L) he took. ,2 ^|uO Ac
,?/£M7. 13 jJlo he constituted. 14 ]‘> i v Aj_Zio i» Bethany.
15 *o^o he drew near. lg m^\x A_»1? lit. /o wAom there is ,
^ i
i. e. having. 17 ^i4-» be immersed , he wasted by immer¬
sion ; also flowed out , and hence ] A^ . ft « a vessel\
x
from which liquors flow out. 18 ^o?, plu. V price,
x
money. The def. form is ),iLo?, which is here and else¬
where used adjectively in the sense of precious , costly;
19 \lsl» he poured forth. 20 v ooiX _»fczV iV was
7
grievous to them . 21 to ato, and hence . .. A - cn
]ooi was possible. 22 ^ he bought. 23 ^<nJ he gave .
24 ]inmVn\ /o the poor. The root is the Arab.
ii i •»> ^
EXERCISES.
185
which in the 5th. conj. signifies to be poor. 25 v_»y to
x
be fatigued , wearied. 26 in every time , always ,
^ in, Xd time. 27 ]Ld5 he cast. 28 )lo he preached ,
Gr. Ktjpvaaa). 29 ^lo spake. 30 aiJj.Do r X ,/or a memorial
of her; root he remembered. 31 he wished.
32 ^Aj he delivered. 33 unleavened bread , from the
x
Arab, to be unfermented. 34 he prepared .
35 .mv\ he ate. 36 « owe, Hebrew 'pfe 37 . » i
w/?/ /me hath come ww/A respect to it (cnZL), viz. the
Passover. 38 he reclined . 39 he was sad. 40 fj_» in
i
Pael, he began. * .JL owe.
PSALM II.
^ •• y •• y y * p p
.|Z<m »^co 3 ^-i>j 5 2 |Zq 1 o|o : (kJkiA f rVr> 1
: 6 l^ol 7 4 oiZLsdZ]o : |j-4-ZX-»o jLj]* ]nSLo o.Lo.o 2
'A •• X 'A
: 7 ^ocri‘Zni-Kj 6 >nm^u 3 V) Xlo 'XL
^ •• •• x
• pp V m. p y •• y o «x y ~
| > V>.« n 4-0ZL5 4 . vccn^-i-j m
: 10 ^OCTLkZL^ XlLqJ CJ1 5 . ^OOLO 9 ^-n . ^r>i
Xl . I ZV> > o] IjI 6 . ,Qj) 12 11 <TlAkLK»>CDO
• •I H 'h •* 7)
V»Xb 7 .. 1 An In Xl ,3 U^-*-J? w*»» 3 Q -05 ^qZcti.
186
EXERCISES.
15V $4-» 8 . u ^Z r A UAaZ ]i]o : Aj] w-iA
18
20
CTL*-;Z1± 17 ^Aj-kjoIo ? 19 y?n? • » \ fcflAl : ^>Z]o w_».j_1d
• • •• 71 •• “TV 'TS
• •7 ns
o 7
0 7
D 7
to <$^1 , 9 H5Z 9
• • 'ti • •
22 o>5Zlo : 21 qAd^co'I ]iAk> ]_»cn 10 . ^qj) ^sijZ 1 -AA
•• ns "Ts •# ^ ##
P ^ *X ^ P « *% o 0 m *X • ^ P * 7 ••0 7
w-.CTLj-JOj-kiOIo |A\*VD I-j^jcA 23 G-kjOA£) 11 .pj|? CTL_»_1_»5
ns ••
: cjlk»5o] x ^Sd AAjZo :iAj P? o.CLaJ 12 . . 24 lL»ZjA
ns ns x v*« ns x
*ZZA v ocri_iAaio : ctiu.o? r A. AA.O .A A|lo
• • v ns 1 ^
y F
. . >m o\v 25 _iAj.nZ>
V
x x
1 a^i he sung. 2 ]Asdo| a nation , plu. has two forms,
viz. ]Zoiof and ,oio). 3 jj5 he meditated. he con-
^ 71
(f 7 m 7
suited. * 1^1 lit. as owe, i. e. altogether. 6 .om^ cwZ
off. 7 . 0 h. he strangled. 8 ^l^Jie laughed. °^qZ_1d he
derided. 10 ]i^b wrath. Root p^5. u J>clZ he grew hot.
, 2 oAl> he disturbed , troubled. 13 ]Z_» in the Hithpaal,
s/?a// declared. This and the two following words
may be rendered literally thus : sAa// be declared
r -j\
with respect to my covenant. u .^7,\. / /zav# begotten
X
thee. Root ,ZL. 15 he ashed. 1 C Z|_» he inherited.
• X
17 ,_L] he tooh, possessed. 18 ; Z v he passed, *| t ZA a bound-
ns
ary. 19 |i> /*£ ruled. 20 Ao a vessel. 21 ^Ziro he understood.
EXERCISES.
187
22 Ip in Ethpeel, he is instructed. he wor¬
shipped. 24 ]A_*2.5 trembling , from Ll he trembled. 25
x
//c A? confident.
St JOHN’S GOSPEL. Chap. IX. 1—13.
. cti!d'| ad a ,_Ao? l-ulnro |a\i ao 1
• • •• 7\ •• ^
^ p % e -xv 77 7 . 7 . .-x.« 7
pen qj_Sd ^5 ^-.oio f -L.So\A *._»oia-4-®o 2
7 p
7 p 7 7
^OCTUl ;Ad] 3 ]lQ£D pi v^OIOOTa] o]
»• 7 P
7 o 7 r
3 .-> 010 ,^ <7LO ]]*) *_i 01001 a 1 Uo 001 U
y 77 y «•• p y . *» P t « P •'» y
A 4 «-A5 r -»? ,Ad? ,nsV)\ Po 4 . ]oia\?
p 7
7 P
6 UAHa Ad U ] x \\ in « ooi 5 llrAn >]
x ••
Jm 6 .ISoXij W anJana^ ft A 5
7 7 P 7
ctloo5 ^Ad ]i >..£ «_o5 ^-Acn
•7S •• X Vi ••
P 7 7
7 7 7
. , . , 7 ^1 .(TLA iAolo 7 ♦ 1 _lAdDD 0013 w_*01CU_»_A ^A
I •• •• ••
p 7 p
P *x
•X 7
• IWm A 1Z]o >- •} ^i]o ,”UjqA»„» 3 n^?oAaiAao
• • •• X •• XI
Aq_»A ,-Ad v oaA ]ocji ]\^y *]o ,_»3 10 —.aion^u* 8
x •• •• •• ^
p p 7 7 0 0 0 7 0 0 7 0
]o 01 A)Aj3 001 QJ 01 looi y *0001 ^-jjAdI looi 3pKi3
188
EXERCISES.
oooi A_»]o "alooi? oooi A.*] 9 .5^0
. }j| bh 1 0C71 001 *0^ ]Soj P") .p
o v •• 7
Ua 11 13
7 7
• • ••
0 7 V
AaZI Uo »1 ctl\ 10
P % p 7 * 7~ey •>. . 7 *
*.« 40 U_»_4 ,g.s> vxqjuj “cniQ_»> lr^-11 • ^poiA ^io|o
I * 7 > .. V
P ?
7—7
•U°. Xj-j) ].i.Ann ^1 . ^o]o *..»- 1 .». s ^
I Vj 1 •• 1 ••
7 7 0 7
. 16 OO t ] OlX r*»iol 12 . t,>,\ waV^Zlo -«U »1 A^lfo
••I I I •• ^ I •• ••
•X 7
7o 0
7 p
^iOJ ‘“OCTli. ^OIQ-.A.'io 13 . (_l| ^ U ,CC7L-. fio]
ZflX lool
1 ,ZL» he begot . 2 ]v^» he saw. 3 *. .mn ,n \ the works of
1
Him, viz. o/~ GW. Root he made, or cfowe.
4 5^» 6*W. 6 ^ool day. 6 ^>sl*±q is able. Root
he went. 8 ^cl» Aph. . he washed. 9 r iaL he
stood. 10 The 8th verse may be literally rendered thus:
But his neighbours and those by whom <ooi^... ? he
was seen from before time, when he begged, said. Is
not this he, who sat and begged? *|ooi P is frequently
employed at the beginning of an expression solely to
indicate an interrogation. n oZooi he is. 12 inf. of
!*?■ 13 ^»As he opened. 14 oii.e. oi.. .3 ; iso-» the name
of whom, or whose name. I5 n ^. ) for 001 where is
EXERCISES.
189
he 1 ? lfl ocrL^ is pleonastic according to the genius of the
Syriac, they brought him , viz. him , who from before
time , &c.
Bar Heb. Chron. Ed. Brans, and Kirsch, p. 41.
P *X I
0 h V
7 7
2 ]Zo5]^ L» 1
7 P P
-no *X 7 7
» i» 7 i» p »• -X p 7 •» 7
4 ]jLrD?CLQ 5j_»o ^->3^00? \
XX
TV *X ^ TV p •• 7 7 ^ e *X ** 7 °k 7 1 7 "i* •• 0
001 . 5 | i n.rn |_®>CLQ ^Z.0 |JOLO
TV 7
7 7 7 P 7
tv P •• 7
^-.5Zo v .x.sn » ^q_l 3,_»o j^ai^ IoAtlI <qj] •.oAd
■p x •
0 0 TV
0 0 7 tv p
•X 7 7
P 7
• V»s^lo 7 Ujo_» ^ootjjAo \ i ]V) >.n
.. 7
JJ
•X P
7 P.7
P 7 X
, o3a£Ln ^qj] 8 ^Zo] ]^Vr> oaio .]A_» ^
TV *X
0 7 0 7 0
p . ^ r _»3Z ^n\ ]2 q\ n ]-Kjjar) ^ooiZi jino 10 ]Z3v^
P p .. 7 7i p •• 7
■a 7
. -X 7 P -A -A -X 7 7
IALDOj^O ( 10 i ,^0 18 v n^\L^ 1 y .Qj| 5011
• • 7
•X »x
TV 7
A-»o AXZ «-»001 ♦ <001 <_*3Z ^ .__i3Zo .sn.t
t ' ~r
p • 7
7 "A »(
7 7 -A 7 PP««7
a-kA-»? Q-KK^)Aji 1 i>Q-l 14 akLK^Z] jJD .]A£I2lSO
P 7 -X
■A 7 7 • 7
15 >..i-n >Zo^n > nn <qj] ^acoo . <qj 1 -na"| ^5 ooi
XT T -7l H •
.]Z3 r i oiZ^>
190
EXERCISES.
« year. 2 Z*j he granted liberty. captives ,
from he made captive. ‘|I_ 05 Cld gifts, presents,
from which in the Ethpaal conjugation has the
sense of making offerings. "vajLs interpreted. 6 *mi>
he interpreted. 7 ]» m . Greek. 8 ,jdZo] he made to dwell,
from ^A_». 9 ni n in Pharos. 10 5 \^Jie cut. u 1_k»5cid a
cell. 12 aX thirty-six. « he changed. Shap. conj.
14 ^q^£) he compared. 15 . > n library .
Bar Heb. Chron. p. 51.
p 7 0 7 7 7
0 7
71 7» 7 7 7
jym s »Z Ai.a n
X X
0 0 7
0 7 *X 7*7 0 0 7
5*0
« 3 cnki*? 2 ]^-»
t' 'A
"i 1 «—»C7l5oj?
p 7 7 1 7 f y 7 •>. -n 7 0 0 7
w 2 )l * 5 -»A_,]o 4 j^5 Nil. V ^D5
7 • P ' 7 P 7 7
I 07 .. 7 0 0 7 7 p 7 7*
jAd] jJD 8 ] 1, 1 1-KJ3 (TlX_ 0 7 Lr-*U^ .jlO Lq\ 5j_»
7* X ^
p •• 7 p 71 0 0 •• 0 ,0 7*
P •• 7 7» « 7>
10
jjLLoSnro 9 ]Zcl£d'|o r >sni A^Ao_®5
7 0 7 .. 7* 7* 7 7 P P 7 7 * 7 7 7* 7
o] \-l±D-3> k ^D ZLkkJ? Aj| IotZZn 0| Aj] ^ Vn
7\ O p 'is • ns • ns ns p y p p y ns
^n^»A_»Z> y*i±D ,3 A 12 A^Ad "Ijctl^o IotZL? cn^
7* • 7* 71 P 7 P P 7 71
14
EXERCISES.
191
** • 'is n\
f> 7 7
A-.]? |ro|Zo ^ZqA ]Z]Zo
•X » ?> -ftp .7 7 P v *-n p •• .*
<Q_» j-fHJ} ^.^0^0 ^uAl 17 v „,L.l 4;V)0 ^ 15 t-»?o_»>
0 • m/l\ 0 •• »X
xp xy o •> pi
)n g^ cn o ,_*A A_»] 1 Zh-°i...»o "jZ5o_Ll ^5 lAj__> r !o .
-ft 7 p 7 7 -X
-ft 7 P
•J> 7
r k}_>cm l_i_.p or:aip .otZi ^jl^) <__o v ^l£) AX
pp .x 77 • P 7
p P 7
Uo .^ZoX ]Z]> AoAs? ^otXlo .U ^
• y •ftp-X'Ti op
7 • 'T*
_ Jr »aio A_K>XA-»*i cnAX-&So> iOjio (^5 an 18 |IkL»]5 oai
^ 7 P P 7 7
7 7 7
7 • *T\
^X I9 jj3 r iiAr) Ij-kkLdo . ^JLo ZaX (JaZ]
P7 7 •• 7 p ^XT^yy 7 •• y
. ^kxi? ».X i|3o U-kj *,X \t\ 2 o wi, i V)\Z
1 '-»ai5o)) of the city Edessa. r/ painter, from
5^ he painted. taheHarms, a letter-carrier. 4 |X?
aboard. 6 _Zu] he brought, Aph. conj. from ]2f he came.
p 7 'ft
6 lZ^j « letter, probably from the Heb. “UK he collected
7 V*Pi hands of; def. state plu. of ] r /| a hand. :! ]. i i ,
Ananias. 9 ‘jZouD'i cures, from . . m ] he healed. '" ^Wnm
i
medicines, pi. of jlnco. "IxnXL because of this, therefore,
composed of ^XLand Ipm. l2 ^ho he wrote. i3 ]vp he sought.
he took the trouble. 15 |Z)cX> of the Jews. 16 v->ra x ,
he is envious. 17 <__£3 he murmured against, when followed
192
EXERCISES.
by as here. 18 ]lkL»]> that 1 should perform , Shaph.
conj. of to he full. The whole expression is as
follows: “ that I should perform here, ^So what¬
soever, criZZL&!o for the sake of which, I was sent,” &c.
“frUio for ]j) 5^ I send.
• •
y 7 p
ZuA ,_Sd ]ocn ^ 1 ] tAw ^QJcn So ^
I Xv ^ ^ ^ ^ X
• • 7 •• 0 7 0 7 7 p
/Li] ]lo\ ,JoZ> cnA {lo"|Z1
1 7> •« i\, •* -k -n i\
0 0 p p P
• .
5 ooi 3 ^Aoo? ^So Aj] 2 So 1i kA y ]o5oio
p 0 o 7
00 00 7
y 5 ]jcnA 4 v oaA v -> .n,n.» y AZu^.Z > Vrm
T> ^ I •» X - 7 >
P P *X PP •• p
.* iuAa£) uA loai yo |soA»
« .n IA he interpreted. This word is identical in
sense with \the substantive form of which comes
afterwards. 2 ]i • he changed. 3 ^o> place , no «
x
permit not themselves to sleep. 4 ySo? he slept. 5 ] i m \ v
because of this , therefore. 6 ]AAqj 2 > work , from aA
/«£ worked .
EXERCISES.
193
P P P
p p p p
J>Q£DO ]SoSQ.»tQ 3 li9r-» ]o01 2 ^A>]
X \\ IS " X “
•X X 7 7 P *X 7 7 7 P
vOotAs? r ^cn 4 aA jId'IZI _aioio r
P P 0
7 7
7o 7 • • X P
y jj]o ^j-JLCllDO r x.l„Cl 6 ]ai 5 ^5^3 |_»CLL_k»
7 P -X
\
P p P P •• 7 7
X -7»
<_i>cn ^_A ^1 -k» y Uj^i n? 7 Z^id]o
* IS “ I
P *X p 7 7 7
U-^l 8 Z5aul
1 ] .Vi it huckster. 2 *qA? he hurried. candle.
4 _dcti AAd lit. because of so, i. e. the cause of so doing.
i\
5 vl5^jj «i?Ao about me. 6 ]cn behold. 7 Z^q£d)o and I
is
v y
thought, the Aph. of ; orr> he thought . 8 Z5au] I made
« light, Aph. of 5 <tij.
7 p
._A Zl»] 2 oiZAj 1 aA Z^ioj ! w»o 5 ^ jj-A)
P 7
7 .* 7
P P 7
,_*? oaio ]^1 q_kj 5 4 ) 0-0 • \ -.-i 3 )imi ^ '(ctlA^d
7 •• 7
P 7 7
* p 7 / K P 7
5 *|A(AikA ^i-LixSC }j_m 1> CTLO jCmVn jj]o m\ An ]
p y
y p
8 tlLDQ-»0 7 AklQ5 xD ](n> ] . . ^ ^
1> X j x
.•Ua*0
is
l ^or p when a man was drunk. 2 jZAjj a woman,
x -
or wife. that he would render hateful , Aph. conj.
13
194
EXERCISES.
from ]mi . - 1 ]n 1 drinking; root, Heb. njjtP. 5 ’)2 AqZ)]Ld
food of barley-meed , a sort of coarse food;
roots ^>1 he eat, and . he pressed. Z?
desolate, Aph. of . 7 )^ xVno wheat. B ] i vnn 1 o?7.
honey.
o o
o 7
3 ^o r iD ]ocn ]^oo |ocn 1 ^oi5
7 0 -X
0 7 7 o o 7 7 o -X 7 7 7 00
jj] jio] \s]A^l yDO ]io$
-7N v -^ ^
0 0 0 0 7
. s .? 5 ]Ld Vsil t-»U
’^cri? //£ raw. 2 ];-o> a field. 3 ^o^d something. 4 |Sd^
lifl 7/77^7 where. 5 . > \ ^ 7727/ voice.
•x 7 o
0 x
0 7 0
.cnarA) ZoA *tdAd 1 ]Z5q_,.')A^ ]oai ^i] >r D
^7» -7N X ~
P 7 P P *\
y£D y 5 w»Aao r s }ccn vj° 3 |ocns 2 ]j<Ti5a2>
k Ti n
•X 7
7 .m* w _,aioA| Oils, -ju_L£) 0 ]oCJl ^^AoZ]
*
. -n
Zuocn AZZAo
7 •• 7 7
•X P
^oZ y wjjAj^Io za.isq qA\3
EXERCISES.
195
lie negotiated. 2 ]joi5cld disease . 3 1 o m v heavy.
4 oi-1d in Ethpeel, to he sick. in my place . 'yso
finite; hence . . ^W ) p it would he quite impos -
X
si hie; . m believed , here imper. Aphel of vn|.
y y y Y y V P
2 ^coq-.«ZZ> oA ^oUl oA 1 wfzuL-jZ.1 p A->f{
** ^ ^ 'n ^ x “
^ P P 7 • • * 7 *X P P P * 7 ^ ^ ^ 7
o"A 4 (-CP^^l1d ocno 3 |j^^£o ^q-A^joAo |oA\ro
« t * p p y ^ p *x *x # * *x • y *x
amAA A. | ooi ^iLqj* qAj <ooA v_»_x^) ocno
V, ^ X
x X ?l Vi -7N
/ r * * * ' f * y y p p
»iol? A \\ln» p >. ».!.}>>&no locn ^j r .ocj A P]
'h ^ 'T'
7 7 *X 7 *X P P P 0 P y
.y^ojjo ^a^nj50 PI )L) p
T\ 'fs
p p» y *X 7 7
Aj) 6 ^.Acn ]ocn 5 yo)nV? >aAAo A
7 7
s'* ** 'JI
» .oi ^ he stole, he trusted. 3 | r ^_^co adored.
4 1 rn. JiCn extendeth or pointeth ; root *cd^. 5 he
destroyed , Palpel of pi ♦ Aj ^jAoi (things
x **
that are) mine.
7 7 0 -X
7 7 •• p 7
7 p
noo « Po cnA,»/n.n? 2 ]ln\o 1 annuo Al^qAl }j^»1
•X 7 P
7 7
1^1 ^ nA Ai v OCnlOL looi JO.^JO 3 ]Zl^_.;.£0 PI cjuo
P 7 0 7 7 7 *X 77 7 0 0 7
1 /Ad 1 u>j? l-i---»l ooio ,_Al AjI AP
-T* 'T'
13—2
196
EXERCISES.
7 P P_ 7
7 7
VOJ-^Z? \Q. noj-j loiZZo ooxo j^5cn ^_1 d oxo 4
o 7 p y
p 7
li-Vjl lloo 7 ,_^o ^1Q
7
'ooqj he took. 2 }Lo\o everything . 3 1A>^^d « roo/!
4 U^ in Pael, to migrate. \o-i_£ he prepared. j he
bore a burden. m mm, ox for nothing. 8 1t-^ Uoo
lit. rmr/ reward hath decayed , i. e. without reward.
THEOPHILUS.
Bar Heb. Chron. p. 132, 133.
p P -X P -X
7
p 7 P P
1^0150] |Sdo]Z ;0 jL_OolZ 1 Vi r ^Z\lD ]_LOl "jjOXO
^ i -tv
ns p »x P
^7 pi
7 P 7
."UjOfiO} 4 . m >.ro 3 or^ I^oiSd 2 qjo
A_>U3omo ~jc7Li-k)Z |Io{ 6 ^oAoi> joAo axil Zulo
^ 7
7 • P
•X o »X 7x7 ns 7 7 ns
^.oail ocno . 1-kkOQ-» 6 b. ^.Loo 0X0 j-QjCO
iDal ^ v a^l ^Do^oV? _JaS
P II I
7 7 ... -n 7.7 I 7. •» -«7 .PP -X.
!xx»u>Z.|o oxol^oo ^5oxkio • .(j^5amo
pp P 7 -X-X7 -X "» x 7 i\ -n
jjai 9 ]_]_Lojoi 8 aiZo5Aj_k) «■ J. y^ CO OX- _j_ Id
7 7 P P P •• 7 7 7 P 7XPP 7
oxo_»Ao ]o^ lAkxu <-k> r -K>o> l^Ak) ♦U-^lZ^0j-^dd1>
EXERCISES.
197
y o •• y
-n 7
•x ti
.-»oio_,Aj_d cnkuo oiAjl^jIo ]r-»^ 10 *-ooVmJ?
7 • 7 7
ai\ Ijlojo ILjaolZ? oiZoZi ot-2ljlZid3 oiZAj] Z5,_»o
^ -n 7i -n i 7 ”
7777 -X 7 £>7 7
Zj^LlO |n\VT)X 11 . iC7l > Ao\Vn Aj)j
P -7% p "*
f 1 ^ • ••? I P P ? P *X P P *X
^-k.n.\o cn_»A^ v _ ,om » n » i m ]]? 1,^1 Uj5o]? |^5a^o
7X7
P P_ 7
P 7
<_k) ^Sol^o ]oiZL^ |j] Ipmk)
0 -X p-ny-x 77 1» P 7 7 p 7
(Ij^oIZ OOIO _L ,cn-,^l0 J-D ^k_*_jZAj? IjLH-*]
71 i -n • ^ ^ * i
>X 7 P -X 7 p p ‘PUP 7
^i^aacn? 16 IZo—.v^l l?ai^ oiZaZ> ZZ*}j ,4 ]Aloy *._»_jl 2 d
V. xn 7 x
•XT' 7 7 71 • 71 p -X 7 P 7 »
wJOOIj^J3 0"L2Ljl AoiX AnZ^o M clZ> 3 16 ^oZ^ai
7 7
7 * P
^..i >A^? ]A^aZ> Ijoio |rDo }]]
X 7t ^ 71 P
**oo 'ft o 7 •X7'* 7 o o 7
r _lD }_J01 17 |qXjj ]0Ol wTL2U O^-llD ^ZoLd IotZZv
7 7 77 -x PP7
vju .1 ^-Q.cdZ U 1j] Zfco 55A_»]o IcnZL
'TS • “ ^ Xi
'Tt 0 'ft 0 TS
7 • P
7 ** _ -X ^
oai? oiuof U] ,-iZak> ]ooi 4-^ZaZu. A.\n n7‘|* ^lo
^ 7> ^ 7
p 7*oo 7—o 7 P 7» 7 ^ 07
. » |j] ^o"| ]ArALo o] .-.Aj] U1 18 jllsA-g.vn *-*_j^3
7o • o o
7 0 7
W? -AjI l iAcl»3 |Ldo li -I ^
* ■>. n\
7 7
7i I 7 • 7 P 7
♦. >da-i 3 ^ oai ]^ 2 lL \oiZ^d _jA1dZ ZZuAo
P 7 7
7 P P
7 -X
|_l!o 3 Zooi ] >.^£Q^o A^i lAoZuiD _-iAai A.iLn.»
t> •
I 0 0 •* V 7 7 0 0 0 o 0 T* 1) 7% 1>
A_»_Ld ]A1oq_* VV > Vn >Aoo .]joi ]ia^2)3 ouAd ]ooij
198
EXERCISES.
I y o i i •• 7 i 7 P i p *
w_>?cniD v^)"j A_»_Ld jlAdo_» 5Ar^o tL^>o1Z o<n
T -A -A *
I p -A 7 7 -A -A p • P 7 7 7 7 7
.IL-^oU -nraQ5 ^OjId l,n\\ u.c-guo
7t * * X
‘V* he knew. 2 qjoj^td| for .onnVnn in. (\mf astronomer.
x
3 %-^lo.j he adhered. 4 .m ,.cnSm heresy. 5 ^Ank) for
i
Z n i nAo^n description of which with j 1 times , may
be rendered chronicles. 6 ] I ^^5ZZL those per-
^ i
sons , or things worthy of praise. 7 ^cn*) 7 he translated\
Aph. of ^oi. 8 oiZo5A1lo AZs excellence , from 5^u .
X
« p »7 y ^ y
9 t.iAo| «rA 10 he went a journey. 11 he has
influence. 12 Aph. he destroyed. 13 ^oo? he cast
away. ^Alo] « 15 Uo r ^j legation. 16 .,n; f vnX
/o Z/w/ mistress. he cursed. . ^rn ; rn he hastened.
17 (o.\-kj fate. 18 UidA^uLd he fulfilled, the Eshtaphel of
P 7
(Ed ; lie cut , or decreed.
LIFE AND WRITINGS OF BAR HEBRiEUS, BY HIS BROTHER
BARSUMA.
7 ,X1 ' P 7 -X 7 7 7 p p
r-^ ocn? (.loAcAd? w_»oia.»o] \>oiAo |^1 d ]ai _1 dc
• *“ ^ \
^ p »x **
2 au r JOk
501 ..\V?
^ P 7
Edo^
. ]ooi
EXERCISES.
199
7 7 0 7 i\ o
0 17 7\ y
A_*A ?0 "|Aj_» l?CTLO locn 4 ^01 A_»|j_xAd 1 r 3
^ Jr .cn ]ocn ^jOioAjI : cnxio 5 qjoioAjl1qX ]Lqd5o^)
“ ” x -n • -ft
V—^ lAii MIL
7\ 7\
7 -X
t A A *0 • Y *A % ••
j-AZ!loo (j^o o (_j5cl£d ,_k) (xn
• • o 7
0001
•X 7 7 7 e *X P 7 p -x p 7 • y
^jOiq_»j| »n.« kjZ.] : \^ak>5 ]5Z]? ]Zo.« ijJ ,__.a X^loo
P 1* 7
P 7
P -X
^oXaj 9 ]_»j_ml_03 w._. 1 kA ]kA? jAd]o l^o? Vio
* •• xb • 'h n\ x
7 o TS 7 c> o 7 i\ • o •• o 7 7 ••
. IjJCjA j.i cnAXk) |tl£UO jm » ..
1 * .... » ■ X
p 7 I 7 -T> 7 7 7 1\ 7 7 7 7
|Aai(1d ]j. ^£1^10
7 *77 7 *X 7 P I 7 7 7 •• 7 7
" *>” vV i-xo505*|3 lAj-jjk) CTL^^O
.-np 7 .n -*1 • P . » P .7 » P p *X 7
t|.i >; <^)k? cao |ccn n .5oi ZL(j-»-io|? pen _k) ,qjdioA_*_j
•* Ns IX •* * ^
*t\ 7 7 7 7 7 «X 7 7
._LoAZ^ _qi»>jo l 4i]o 12 ctl1£l* w^oiajj] _Ao ivXZ] po
^ • • 'K V •• 'TS • -7\
p 7 p P
]?Aj-Lo : ]jaki ,-Aoo |xd5 ^1d ^LoZ loai po
i> -n Tt •• x
P .. •• 7 « "X P 7 * P P .7 7 « •• p 7.
kico? (jloi AqjloAuLo} pdAh-13 ctijlIo qjlxoZ. 14 P-j-/
• *r\ -n -?> • t>
•X -X-ft » P 7.PP7 71 p » « ' x
^O^OU ^QJOI ^|j ^£1C7U U_JD^CO Aj(j3Q-C0J2)
• •• • ^ • <h T
7 p
•X 7
^aik) ] r jjAoo • . ^ oai . 15 v a i ^Ajo oiro
^jlAOQj OJ^j y»-t } ] A\ » nra ^.AjO 16 ] Avn^X_u ]APkio
•X p 7
Tt 7 0 7
1 AZkZ jjnD airo ojl£30 oj_ZAoA.*_ kA fcoA
200
EXERCISES.
TV 7 "X P
p 7
]A^jro 18 w.a....i3] laloAo p IAojo __p . 17 1 ^\d
•• • X -n
• 7 o »X p x 7 77 n> is
. ocn |_»AX aiVo 19 ]Zq1q-^1cl^jd ^cn\La>)o
7 7
7 P 7 P 7
•X 7
Up \ ]AjlJ 5 20 aj»Ar)Z1o IZaco") oZ] jrm.n r -^ i*oo-i-oo
07*0 o • p *x 7 77
loan adI . "jocn UjAlo U ocno . 21 i^omkiiDJo
~ “ TV "V TV V, Tv *
7 p 7 0 P 7 P V P P T • 7 P *
5^.1 wlZ p .Via ^ Vfe^O’O IjTLL 22 }j<TliO y> i-i_^
p 7 TV p 7
P 7
ocn t A\^ -,A_» ]Aj-» l?aioo : ]ocn w-.cnoA^] U’l
V"
I^Zo 1H* r k> 23 Ql^oSo ai^£)
7 7 m. 0 **7
•* P X
p 7 P
• •7 P O
p . 2 ‘ ^-kkIo] j-L2cn ,__lAdcl_» 1A1Z ^jActlo ;1dUqV
• ^
<r
777 -X P * 7 .P } P7 7 * f« 7 «
^Djjo wOoAoj? (m-i_4^oo p«-^ p^o ^ ^o(u.o XloZ.
]Aj-Ol ]A^» Vo jj] ,w»^dZ*| y O,. t. V?\Zo 25 mA » \ n
“ TV '-* * TV I TV
p p -7VP7TV P * P 7
UIqjcdj 26 aiA-»-. ]ijukL»? cHj-.Ud ]ccn ^»]Sd ^ZjZo
TV TV V I X “* -TV TV
P 7 7 7 7 D 7 • p
^yS\ 27 wa-jALoXZ .w-»-^o]o .]ccn ^o]o
..7 P 7 P»« 7 7 • -X • Tv 7 P
Uajboo Uv-*?° 1j-££Lk» 1aVZ*|o ZoAo] ^jAon » jJo
7\ I
7 7
7 > 0 0
o y
W >.olo ♦ ^ Jl _.oo;-L ^OjAd il *|aio ,]Zak) _Ld
^ X • * 'tX ••
]ZuaQ-a_Lo r k> jjqV ^iolZZo looZ ]3o uQioiVZlo V_i_ajZ]
IX 7X *T\ lx * ‘T\
7 0 7 0 0 0 »X lx 'Tx 'rx 7
^]}0 r _iAcn po . (] . UnXio ocn Lpj IsOyioj y_»]
EXERCISES.
201
P y
•X P
V • 0 •• 0 0
•_0 ^ lk)CL. ot^id ]oci ;lo] U-lji janoi __iAcn
o 7
7 P
]ZolO o] ]ooi lOD Uo ^.-kk^.O
x x " x x
7 o o o o 7 7 o o o •• p 7 7
j.Sd"|o *U_£d)o ]i ■ Vxa-So pj^-LmX *)j_o Ijj^o n?
P P -X 7 7
7* P XX
.oiAXkA p5oj* ,^v n :]j] £o)> ^o, 1 d *jzoLd .orZ>
0 7
7 •• 7
P P 7
IIqjjJ ]_»-0 Q_L ^._»]o ^01OlDQ_* 28 ]^lm
7 P
P 7 P
7 p
jAki») $A^ 1,-4 jo j-Loaio : 29 ]_L_. ^jooi
7 P X P 7
lm^ ^_,3Z *_Q0] .io?1 wi-.] so 1ZqJ-_,5Q1d
x x x • x x
0 O 7 p .x x 7 0 7 7 o •>.
]-i_CD5arA U-.co3o
-n x
y »x y y •• y p o *x y
!>a\-»1o oiAjAt) 31 w£qj3o <^\o
•x
7 •• 7
7 •
•X 7 0 7 0 *X 7 7 • P
Q_»^ZZ Vo OOOl loQ-KKiOj . jiclo ^010,-1-kAZZl , oe^Cn
P *x
♦X 1% TV 0
^oooiZj ]kAp? ^So Ijj-kj ,_1o
T T • ••
y p •• y p
•x y p ^
32
q-j5. |_*o> .qjoi .loai*) .cidAj-j.£d |j] ^ 0]
p 7
X 7
7 P 7
•X 7 •••X
't-OA ^ 000 ^oai_»--a^? 1^0,\ aj.Lo5lo v ooi_»-®q_cl\
i P P -X 7
•• P P
7 p
7 7
"jocn iL. y 001 yD v x\t A2 xZ ] » w _lD ,^V >
~ 'ft * * X 'ft 'ft *
pp y pp»»i •• y p »x pp»x
: l^lo 33 UjoZ ^lo
P7 P7P-X7 P 7 P p I 7 7 0
]Cnv*» ]o3 ]-»Q.Cn^o ]. ,m in ] . m^lji ], » ^Vn\ U1
p p
P •• -X 7 P
7 0
aijAo ZclX w_».j^»o ja-0cm0-.p U-»-^Ado Li ->Z^d
XX * X X I v, X .
202
EXERCISES.
7 7
•X P
P p y
34 ^_»^D5 .1^1 Aj_»? iclIjoAo ^Al iZ ]AXZ>
> O i
• y p y 07 o y o o v 7
oaxo ]oai «_»aioA-.1 ) 55 ] o^oZLo "|ox_Z\ ^ai_.
*" "■ *» ~
P *X ^ ° 7 PI
1 vOCLSU (L ^£10
7 7 7
• Ti p 7
OXO jjLOl
r *x p
y y
p *x
}_»0 OJ uaUJO « 36 *|ZqJ-kj llo") : joo.«.\
7 7
P 7
7 7
5 r _»o . ] i ]A » \n\ ]iai aiZo a^±ol]o
P -X
p 7 p .. 7
•X 7
] tt i.no : }oj |ja_.-^05 ]L.qjqdo oiZaX? ]o.>.,\oA-Q
• • t\ n\ ns \v 7 ) 7s
•• y p y 7»yi p •• y p y *x
v .\ >? 37 ^k> : }».ito?|> c tl±d
7 7
7 7
•X 7
38
P *7 7 7.
■ • ^ 1 _-»Z|lO Q-mlJ. nZI po . O O-i. .j^Z] 5Q-k>Ao
y y 077 o 7
o »x y
0*1 . jlDj-LO ,-LO ]Zcl\^0
akio
P -X P 7
7P P7 P p 7 P y
lV-^o?5 IIdojA o] : ]L I^o^o Ij^o]? ]Soq->A
PX7 PP *X 7 7 77 P p P
V*-»rO ]joi> 39 ? ]ZolD5
• * 7S
o p*x? 07 •• y y •• 7 y y y ?>
]lo]o ]Zo_^o |jLa.cnSo\ ^iio tUkA rJ _K>2’)>
-7v p ^
p •• y
p »x 'n
p p •• "ft
]_i_ja_»o cl_»ASq_» .1Aj^j)Zo
•x y p **
•x •• p y
. |o)i ^cna-ioZ^o ^ooiZoZl* VuxSdjIo
• ” ^ n
y»y^p >*% 7 • ^ * x ^ * 7 -7 ^ y •
|ocn (J p^Ojiao pO oij-^-OA
•X 7 777 «PP 7 7 • P*XPP*X
aj_Lo . ox^jjiQo axo ]ccn jlaXs ).m inn
X 7 I* P 7 P • • 'X 7 p P7 p
40 a_.5;_..Z’)5 ]v-»^ r - i^oaoJL^ |1 qj.£clk> ]^vV i jJ?
v< ■ « X .....
EXERCISES.
203
0 *x *x
0 0 P y 0 0
: ]cn ,i.V)Z b^ ^-*1? ^Ao
O 'D 'Is
0 0 »X 7 •• 7 • 7
P o
r-Kj 41 . » m^n ] .-nn 1 \ VJ>50J5 ,_Ao ^OCTLC) ^£) ]]<
7 p 7\ i\ 7 7
7 o
0 P -X
oi loau jn ms ,-iO o] 1Zj-L ,_Ld i3"|oo._»
„ X ••
P777 P 7 p p7 o 7
1 APyloSoo IAjA-^o 42 ]A_i_JLkii.Z Nl 1 «jdAd5 o]
o p y o
y o y op o
]cnJZ\ "jocn 43 >nA^? Ijcti loai ^As? ]Ad
0 -7
‘•0 7 .. p -x -X -X
lorn oA-»l p <_Aco : j_»i^o
X Xv 'Is
0 0 0
7 7 7 P 7
_Ad U ]A-»^1 44 ]ASo.» 1 \ |k)A >;-rnv ^
7 7 •• P 7 P -X
7 P P
i-HL|o ]jdAid 5 ]L.aco Aacoo ^Arfjo *1 A£uAdo
• * X, • -n • 7 p • x -i»
•liill «ftii ^so
^ T\
1 . o : « history. 2 au r jai AZv death , from Jll he died.
o y '7s
3 j_»o ^ASd]? of the when and the where and the how ,
?7 zms. 4 _^<n he meditated. 5 . <> Ohald. 1W in Ethp.
he evaded. 6 ^_, r _»oi then. summer. 8 ^ Ac 7
rushed on suddenly. % chance. 10 ./ \A^\ he
incited. 11 ^055 whether ? 12 ctlLoj® Atf /ooA himself
off. 13 ]-A j ]j 2 ) honour. 14 jl_L£ Arabs. 15 he took
X ^ ^
pleasure. 16 ] l -n > v .> * elegant. 17 I 21 S.Q leaves. la —^ ie
204
EXERCISES.
23
24
perceived. 1!) ~p o^o. vn heat , from fever. 20 ^Ad he
x
contended. 21 lie used medicine , from feoco flwe-
dicine. 22 }jcni Aph. part, from jiai /o profitable.
'IS
CTL^alD his constitution of body , from mixe( ^
he was infirm. 25 ] A»\ n cell. ^\Lm^the pulse.
27 S n^\i he vexed. 28 ] • An \ grass. 29 ]v. he flourislieth.
I X
]Zq_L»5q1o confession; root . 31 *cqj5ql£) government.
i
it rent or cleaved. 33 ] » in ) conversation, from ]JZ
iteravit. 34 l<TL^\^)cnJ Mar Yaballoho. ]o> VnA-o
— i
a laudable catholic. 36 ]loU^ a shop. fo
x ^
P mm
from ours , i. e. the church of the Jacobites, o")
30
32
? , pp
38
)vn n 1 \ O day of perdition! he rushed
suddenly. 40 deprived. 41 ]3po_* ^ an
answer to one question. 42 | A^iVnO sensible. cnA^^j
43 1oai whom (God) hath adorned. 44 ] Acn I i breath.
45 ]iiS « foreign language.
HYMN OF EPHRAIM
ON THE
HOLY TRINITY.
o TS
• IjAj
7> -ft
]oOU
4
» -X
. ] A_» QJD5
■U-J
o • 7
. 8 ] 1 \Vi 7
!>OQ-k*Z
Q\ 0 •• 7
.|c»An^
I
^Oa_CO
'Ts 'TS
.loCTU
P 'A
ioA_»o
•K 7> 7 7
. 2 pAlo ^mnnn -
^ * •• P
•W 2
•X
^OQ_kjZ
'h o
*r-*r*
i 7
o o *7 7
.1/LlSOO 'Yl
• ‘Ts •• X
1&1
.lloda
^L]l
5
. ojcn
uo
7 x
7 7
* 7
. 001
•
p V
H?
7 X * 7
.Aotl ^lo
7 P *X
2 <}]?
9 ]oZAj
o 7
liolj
* 7
. 001
o 7
1 i^>0
.£d|
•»» 7 p
>
p p «X P
♦I^lqq-1 5 ]]>
•
6
P 7
P I
1
V
7 7> » 7
3 ^)|0
P *x *x
."|icnQ_UD ooi
I
I>CLiu£D
'TS 'TS
♦ loou
P 7
kol?
.a
0 7 7 7
7\ • • 7
jl-Vo
•':k
P ••
l 1 . , ^
o o 7
- 1U
•
^ X 71
* 4 °
206
EXERCTSES.
0 0 *X 7
,|nnoi 11
ns •• o x x
♦ toAD ■ajiO.i.CO
P P Tl 7
♦ }jL_>
P X 7 7
»'|A_»]_kkLo vj_» |
. 16 V»oAd2
Tl 7 0 7
. CTULjJL 12 V»-2L*3
P -X 7 7
.]Zl»clo _g^o
* * * #
♦
o 7^0
.^-SoZ
•
** m. o 0 7
1001 12
P 7 -X X
♦ ^SdZ ooi ^Q-i-oo
oo 0 7
•U” u??
^ p «x y ^ *x
*froj3 0~L-»-l00>
\ l ' x ' x ■’*
♦ |A_»o_o <q_lqj
P 7, -X X
.^_LoZ ocn
op 7 P
Vo
p 7 71 y
.1^) OlSO^*
™ *X ^ <X
cnZ^D ^_1d 1s ^cl0j
. P -X -x . y
. £_®30-O «-^o0330
•X « * p 0 7
^o L |ooi 13
71 • • P I X
♦ ]ot!cl® »x_m
•X •• 7 P 7
♦ ^ooijAZiZ?
♦ l_i—»-» |l Q1
7 7 P 7
.r-KJ JL\ZD
• •
0 0 •• P
♦ lASoa^ro Vo
'h
P -X P 7
«]Zo iSn->OLQ
0 Tl p 7
.}mSn^ ]Zoio
»jA,'PVivV>\
.*■*^2 0C7I _kkTL2) 14
7 ^ o'*
.A\l ]AXl
0 0 ' 7>
•V^ vr^
a
* o
r>
*o
■ *0
♦
P ”7\ 0 •• 7
♦ "jA.a.inX U-io
.7 .X 71 p
.!>QA 001 *-0>l?
p Tl op
♦ ] X.C1.9 Vo
»\ 'TX 'TS -7\
.^qj! l$CJ?
•> P -X 7 ft 1
♦ 19 ]ZqlCiSD Vi 1-0,1
•x 'H “7s 'TX
• <oj1 Uru;
EXERCISES.
207
.ctlmA 2> Z 22 *^oi5 19
.OlZl 001 «->^Ag) 15
.w; ? H 5 A 1
i y p y
♦ 20 ,-»__^-ro I^jeA
p -i. ^ "i 7
. OULlO «_Q£0|O
•x y y -?i
. w_*01CL^i3 VJ>
p . 0 -!> 7
p p y p
."IZv-K^ro oirD
p y p y
]oai>
p p y p
.]Z^ClT0 Uo
.ot_k»A£) vT^oZ 22 ^oii 20
•W*^ 18
•tau^a 4iZ
. •T'p-x y
♦ }l *AoV> rLo
•
p -x p y
. ]Zq.J_SQ-*015
p p x y
.^o ? y w-*^]o
p *x y x
.]A_®clq
^ 7 pi
P P »X P
• UO-OOL iU
y y p -x
23 • xt, \ ]_»^k£I)Q_® 21
•
1\ * 0 7S I
17
PI 0 0
.IjjAd }joi
•x y -x y
.001 —K t 001
• • *
■s p P ■» * «
y p -x -x
♦ \joAj0 Q_a001
.lia*. ■ «^io
.. i y ^ *
.l^ao i^lo
4^)U W^oa-» 22
^7 ^7
. 0T-*jA£D iO.-O 18
•
n\ i n\ y
♦ ot-»A-»]^ lmo>
y •• y p y
. ^oiaioj^l? ]i^A
p y » *x
♦ 1;*^ (j^JDCL®
p p is y
. iO?y OlXcL^
-x y -a y
.oijXi-o }mrD?
y x P 7
. w_»010Aj1 U rO
p -T> P -X
.]LoA-» !>oZgl>^kH;
«P I y -n
♦ 2l
208
EXERCISES.
P y
■£o 24
P P P 1\
.(loo |-qA-»
^ I «x 7
♦ <00 lO )
p p -n "*>
.^Ano }mnl>
P -X 7 *i 1
. wi_xjjcq_» ^Ld |o
p p x 7
• AU ^3oZ 23
7 7
P 7 I 7
."I^A ^?oZ
7 7 p
..no\A1 d U?
* P *X 'X 7
.(-•300 O.J03 !>ol
1 ] m » i sign or symbol, banner, or standard. 2 AAd
X
sordid, blind, ignorant. vigils, ^oor/ angels.
X
p p ^ p p p <X o *rs -ts
4 ]. ^\n^ ]j 5 indivisible. 5 )n.n n\ }]> inscrutable. 6 l’l^
^ ** o V p
arrows. 7 ^o q_k»Z between. 8 P Vn orators. 9 ]oZ 2 V
grieveth. 10 ]Z ;Alk 3 instrument. 11 utility . 12 ] A 1
right, sincere. 13 5o^ Ae painted. 14 ,vnx he baptized.
15 30? he agitated. 16 ]_ioAr>Z contention. 17 ]_i53 $33 wz’Z/z-
omZ investigation. 111 should depart. 19 ]v n^vn
fountain, from mtoj- g0 • » much, to be construed
with . 21 ]A-i__kj 3 22 ^(ji5 /*£ prompt, for
1
promptly. This verb is used as an adverb to the
next. 23 AAjA Zo 7/iw «r//o formed.
THE END.
Works published by John W. Parker,
West Strand, London.
Select List No. III.
A RUNDINES Cami, sive Musarum Cantabrigiensium Lusus Canori,
Li. collegit atque edidit IIenricus Drury, M.A. The Third Edition, thoroughly Revised
and Enlarged, 12s.
Becker’s Gallus; or Roman Scenes of the Time of Augustus, with
Notes and Excursus illustrative of Manners and Customs. Second Edition, Enlarged and
Improved. Translated by the Rev. F. Metcalfe, M.A., Head Master of Brighton College.
Post Octavo, with Coloured Illustrations Nearly ready.
Becker’s Charicles; or, Illustrations of the Private Life of the
Ancient Greeks. Translated by the Rev. F. Metcalfe. Post Octavo, with Illustrations, 12s.
A Complete Creek Grammar for the use of Learners. By J. W.
Donaldson, B.D., Head Master of King Edward’s School, Bury St. Edmund’s. Strongly
bound, 4s. 6c?. fe-
The Agamemnon of iEschylus, the Greek Text, with a Translation
into English Verse, and Notes, Critical and Explanatory. By John Conington, B.A.,
Fellow of University College, Oxford. 7s. 6d.
The Antigone of Sophocles, in Greek and English, with Critical
and Explanatory Notes. By J. W. Donaldson, B.D. Octavo, 9s.
The Phsedrus, Lysis, and Protagoras of Plato; a new and literal
Translation, mainly from the Text of Bekker. By J. Wright, B.A., Trinity College,
Cambridge. 4s. 6d.
Aristophanis Comoedim Undecim cum Notis et Indice Historico.
Edidit Hubertus A. Holden, A.M., Coll. SS. Trin. Cant. Socius. Octavo, 15s.
C. Cornelii Taciti Opera ad Codices Antiquissimos exacta et
emendata, Cominentario Critico et exegetico illustrata. Edidit Franciscus Ritter,
Professor Bonnensis. Four Volumes, Octavo, 28s.
In this Edition of Tacitus is given a complete collation of all the older and only important MSS., with the emen¬
dations of Professor Ritter, and offormer Editors, followed by a Commentary, containing an explanation of all diffi¬
cult passages, and a justification of new readings introduced. The true reading has been restored in more than one
hundred and eighty passages, hitherto regarded as hopelessly corrupt. Also, a Life of Tacitus, a criticism of his writ¬
ings, and of the original form of the Works still extant, with Indices to the Text, and the Notes by the Editor.
2
Select List, No. III., of Works
Sophoclis Philoctetes. With Notes. By W. IIaig Brown, B.A.,
Fellow of Pembroke College, Cambridge. 2s.
Sophoclis (Edipus Tyrannus. With Notes. By W. Haig Brown,
B.A. 2s. 6d. _
The Fables of Babrius, from the newly-discovered Manuscript;
with the Fragments of the lost Fables. Edited, with Notes, by G. C. Lewis, Esq., M.P.,
M.A., late Student of Christ Church. Post Octavo, 5s. 6d.
Pindar’s Epinician Odes, and the Fragments of his Lost Compo¬
sitions, Revised and explained ; with Copious Notes and Indices. By J. W. Donaldson,
B.D., Head Master of King Edward’s School, Bury St. Edmund’s. Octavo, 16s.
A Commentary on the Book of the Acts of the Apostles. By the
Rev. W. Gilson Humphry, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, Examining
Chaplain to the Bishop of London. Octavo, 7s.
The Cambridge Greek and English Testament, in Parallel Columns
on the same Page. New Edition, with Marginal References. 8s. 6d.
The Greek Text of the Acts of the Apostles, with Notes, Original
and Selected. By H. Robinson, D.D., Rector of Great Warley. Octavo, 8s.
Theocritus. Codicum Manuscriptorum Ope Recensuit et Emen-
davit Chris. Wordsworth, S.T.P., nuper Scholse Harroviensis Magister. Octavo, 13s. 6d.
The Iphigenia in Aulis of Euripides. Cambridge Edition, with
English Notes. Octavo, 6s._
The Iphigenia in Tauris of Euripides. Cambridge Edition, with
English Notes. Octavo, 5s.
Select Private Orations of Demosthenes, with English Notes. By
the Rev. C. T. Penrose, M.A., Head Master of Sherborne School. 5s.
The Frogs of Aristophanes, with English Notes. By the Rev.
H. P. COOKESLEY. 7S.
Homer’s Iliad: With Anthon’s Notes and Homeric Glossary:
Edited by J. R. Major, D.D., Head Master of King’s College School. 6s.
Xenophon’s Anabasis, I. and II. With English Notes, by Dr.
Hickie, Head Master of Hawkeshead School. 3s. Qd.
The Aulularia of Plautus, with Notes by J. Hildyard, B.D.,
Fellow of Christ’s College, Cambridge. 7s. 6d.
The Mensechmei of Plautus, with a Glossary and Notes, by J.
Hildyard, B.D. 7s. 6d.
The Phenomena and Diosemeia of Aratus, translated into English
Verse, with Notes, by J. Lamb, D.D., Dean of Bristol. Octavo, 7s. 6d.
Published by John W. Parker. 3
The iEneid of Virgil, with Anthon’s Notes. Edited by J. R.
Major, D.D., Head Master of King’s College, London. 7s. 6d.
Select Epistles of Cicero and Pliny. With English Notes. By
the Rev. J. Edwards, of King’s College, London. 4?.
The Speeches of Demosthenes against Aphobus and Onetor.
Translated, with Notes explanatory of the Athenian Laws and Institutions, by C. R.
Kennedy, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Post Octavo, 9s.
Bceckh’s Public Economy of Athens. Translated by G. C. Lewis,
Esq., M.P., A.M., late Student of Christ Church. Octavo, 18s.
The New Cratylus; Contributions towards a more Accurate Know¬
ledge of the Greek Language. By J. W. Donaldson, B.D. New Edition, in the Press.
Stemmata Atheniensia; Tables of Biography, Chronology, and
History, to facilitate the Study of the Greek Classics. 5s.
A Selection from the Greek Verses of Shrewsbury School; with
an Account of the Iambic Metre and Style of Greek Tragedy, with Exercises in Greek
Tragic Senarii. New Edition, revised. 8s.
Characteristics of the Greek Philosophers, Socrates and Plato.
By the Rev. John Philips Potter, A.M., late of Oriel College, Oxford. 4s. 6d.
Dahlmann’s Life of Herodotus, drawn out from his Book. Trans¬
lated by G. V. Cox, M.A., Esquire, Bedell, Oxford. Post 8vo, 5s.
A Life of Aristotle, including a Critical Discussion of some Ques-
tions of Literary History connected with his Works. By the Rev. J. W. Blakesley,
M.A., late Fellow and Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8s. 6d.
Schleiermacher’s Introductions to the Dialogues of Plato; trans¬
lated by the Rev. W. Dobson, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 12s. 6d.
Travels in the Track of the Ten Thousand Greeks; a Geogra¬
phical and Descriptive Account of the Expedition of Cyrus, and of the Retreat of the Ten
Thousand, as related by Xenophon. By W. F. Ainsworth, F. G. S., Surgeon to the late
Euphrates Expedition. Post Octavo, 7s. 6d.
The Classical Museum; a Journal of Philology, and of Ancient
History and Literature. Yol. I., 12s. 6d.; also Nos. I. to IV., 4s. each.
The Student’s Manual of Ancient History; containing the Poli¬
tical History, Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Nations of Anti¬
quity. By. W. C. Taylor, LL.D. Fourth Edition, 10s. 6d.
The Student’s Manual of Modern History; the Rise and Progress
of the Principal European Nations, their Political History, and the Changes in their
Social Condition. By W. C. Taylor, LL.D. The Fourth Edition, 10s. 6d.
4
Select Works published by John W. Parker.
Classical Texts. Carefully revised from the best Editions.
Cicero de Senectute. Is.
Cicero de Amicitia. Is.
Cicero pro Plancio. 1 s.
Cicero pro Milone. Is.
Cicero pro Mursena. Is.
Cicero de Officiis. 2s.
Ciceronis OratioPhilippicaSecunda. Is.
Taciti Germania. Is.
Taciti Agricola. Is.
Excerpta ex Annalibus Taciti. Edited
by Professor Pillans. 2s. 6d.
Caesar de Bello Gallico. I. to IY. Is. 6d.
Iloratii Satirae. Is.
Terentii Andria. Is.
Virgilii Georgica. Is. 6d.
Ovidii Fasti. 2s.
Platonis Phaedo. 2s.
Platonis Menexenus. Is.
.ZEschyli Eumenides. Revised by J.
W. Donaldson, B.D. Is.
Euripidis Bacchae. Is.
Excerpta ex Arriano. 2s. 6d.
A New Hebrew Lexicon.—Part I. Hebrew and English, arranged
according to the permanent letters in each word (by means of which arrangement the root
is more readily found than by any former method.)—Part II. English and Hebrew. With
a Hebrew Grammar, Vocabulary, and Grammatical Analysis of the Book of Genesis. Also
a Chaldee Grammar, Lexicon, and Grammatical Analysis of the Chaldee Words of the Old
Testament. By the Rev. T. Jarrett, M.A., Professor of Arabic, Cambridge. Octavo, 2 Is.
Hebrew Grammar; designed for the use of Schools and Students.
By the late Chistopher Leo, of Cambridge. Octavo, 12s. Cd.
The Guide of the Hebrew Student; Containing Easy Passages in
pure Biblical Hebrew, with Keys and Glossary for English Learners. By H. Bernard,
Hebrew Teacher in the University of Cambridge. 10s. Qd.
An Analysis of the Text of the History of Joseph, upon the Prin¬
ciples of Professor Lee’s Hebrew Grammar. By Alered Ollivant, D.D., Regius Pro¬
fessor of Divinity, Cambridge. Octavo, 6s.
The Psalms in Hebrew, with a Critical, Exegetical, and Philolo¬
gical Commentary, intended for the Use of Students. By G. Phillips, B.D., Fellow and
Tutor of Queen’s College, Cambridge. Two Volumes Octavo, 32s.
The Book of Solomon, called Ecclesiastes—the Hebrew Text
and a Latin Version—with Notes, Philological and Exegetical, and a Literal Translation
from the Rabbinic of the Commentary and Preface of R. Moses Mendlessohn. By the Rev.
Theodore Preston, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College. Octavo, 15s.
A Practical Arabic Grammar. By Duncan Stuart. Octavo. 16s.
The Elements of Syriac Grammar. By G. Phillips, B.D.,
Fellow and Tutor of Queen’s College, Cambridge. Second Edition, with Additions.
Octavo, 10s.
The Chaldee Text of Daniel V., and the Syriac of St. Matthew,
VI. Analyzed. By the Rev. T. R. Brown, M.A. Octavo, 3s. 6d.
Parker's Catalogue of Books , in all branches of Education ,
including those published under the sanction of the Committee of Council on Education ;
and the Publications of the Committee on General Literature and Education, appointed by
the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, may be had on application.
_
_
_
t
** ,
w
•
Date Due
-FAni.il ty
.
JUNIOr^l
D
mr *
1
-
<f)
V